DBS3900 Hardware Description 2013

DBS3900

Hardware Description

Issue 11

Date 2013-08-23

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 11 (2013-08-23) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides reference information for the DBS3900 site planning and deployment.It describes the application scenarios, components, functional modules, and cables in theDBS3900.

Product VersionThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

DBS3900 V100R007C00

DBS3900 GSM V100R014C00

DBS3900 WCDMA V200R014C00

DBS3900 LTE V100R005C00

DBS3900 LTE TDD V100R005C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Base station installation personnel

l System engineers

l Site maintenance personnel

Organization1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description

This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.

DBS3900Hardware Description About This Document


ii

2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet

The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in thecabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.

3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900

This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.

4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks

This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios ofvarious DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900cabinets.

5 DBS3900 Power System

The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. WhenAC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to-48 V DC power for the base station.

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in thecabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU andUEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components toachieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.

7 DBS3900 Cables

This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in variousscenarios.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of riskwhich, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if notavoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.



iii

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.



iv


> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



v

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.....................................................................1

2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet......................................................................102.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply...............................................................................................112.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply...............................................................................................392.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply..................................................................................................482.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply..................................................................................................49

3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900.......................................................................................553.1 BBU3900......................................................................................................................................................................563.1.1 BBU3900...................................................................................................................................................................563.1.2 BBU3900 Functions..................................................................................................................................................573.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................573.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.......................................................................................................................................573.1.5 WMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................853.1.6 UMPT........................................................................................................................................................................913.1.7 GTMU.....................................................................................................................................................................1003.1.8 LMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................1083.1.9 WBBP......................................................................................................................................................................1123.1.10 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................................1183.1.11 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................................1273.1.12 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................................1293.1.13 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................................1333.1.14 UTRP.....................................................................................................................................................................1343.1.15 USCU.....................................................................................................................................................................1423.1.16 UBRI......................................................................................................................................................................1463.1.17 UCIU.....................................................................................................................................................................1493.2 RRU............................................................................................................................................................................1513.3 SLPU..........................................................................................................................................................................1523.3.1 SLPU.......................................................................................................................................................................1523.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU......................................................................................................................1523.3.3 UELP.......................................................................................................................................................................153

DBS3900Hardware Description Contents


vi

3.3.4 UFLP.......................................................................................................................................................................1553.3.5 USLP2.....................................................................................................................................................................1563.4 WGRU........................................................................................................................................................................1583.5 EMUA........................................................................................................................................................................161

4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks..................................................................................................1634.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900 ...........................................................................................1644.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900....................................................................................................1664.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900...................................................................2184.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets............................................................................................................................2204.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet.............................................................................................2204.4.2 Components in the OMB.........................................................................................................................................2204.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)............................................................................................................................2314.4.4 Components in the IMB03......................................................................................................................................2424.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack................................................................................2554.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment.....................................................................................................269

5 DBS3900 Power System............................................................................................................2735.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables...................................................................2755.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet...........................................2755.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet......................2765.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)..............................................................................2825.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) .............................................................2875.1.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack or Wall.......................................2935.1.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet ...................................................................2955.2 Power Distribution Schemes......................................................................................................................................2965.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet............................................2975.2.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet..............................3015.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)..............................................................................3105.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) .............................................................3145.2.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack or Wall.......................................3185.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet ...................................................................321

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System..................................................................................................3266.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet..................................................3286.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet.................................3296.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D).................................................................................3336.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) ................................................................3376.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03 or IFS06...........................................................................3396.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet.......................................................................3416.7 Customized Alarm Input............................................................................................................................................344

7 DBS3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................3487.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900...........................................................................................................................349



vii

7.1.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................3497.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections............................................................................................................................3857.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections.........................................................................................................................................4097.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................................4207.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections......................................................................................................................4517.2 BBU3900 Cables........................................................................................................................................................4537.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................................4537.2.2 PGND Cable............................................................................................................................................................4567.2.3 BBU Power Cable...................................................................................................................................................4577.2.4 E1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................................................................4597.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable...................................................................................................................4637.2.6 FE/GE Cable............................................................................................................................................................4647.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable........................................................................................................................4657.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports..........................................................................................4667.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports...................................................................................................4667.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable......................................................................................................................................4677.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable.........................................................................................................................................4687.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...................................................................................................................4727.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................4737.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................4737.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU................................................................................4747.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..............................................................................................................4757.2.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA...............................................................................................................4767.2.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)....................................................................................................4777.2.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)....................................................................................................4787.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................................4797.2.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable........................................................................................................................................4807.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable.........................................................................................................................4817.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations........................................................................................................4827.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance....................................................................................................................484



viii

1 Changes in the DBS3900 HardwareDescription

This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.

11 (2013-08-23)This is the eleventh official release.

Compared with issue 10 (2013-05-27), no topic is added to or deleted from this issue.

Compared with issue 10 (2013-05-27), this issue includes the following changes:

Topic Change Description

3.1.10 LBBP Added the LBBPd4 used in LTE TDDscenarios.

10 (2013-05-27)This is the tenth official release.

Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), this issue does not include any new information.


DBS3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description


1


l 2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios withAC Power Supply

l 4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and RacksUsed by the DBS3900

l 4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used bythe DBS3900

l 4.3 Engineering Specifications ofVarious Cabinets Used by the DBS3900

l 6.3 Scenario Where the BBU IsInstalled in the APM30H (Ver.D)

l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed inthe APM30H (Ver.D)

l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed inthe APM30H (Ver.D)

Added description related to an IBBS700T orIBBS700D.

l 3.1.5 WMPTl 3.1.6 UMPTl 3.1.8 LMPTl 3.1.9 WBBPl 3.1.10 LBBP

Added specifications of these boards.

7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable Added the principles for classifying andselecting CPRI fiber optic cables.

Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), no information is deleted from this issue.

09 (2013-02-20)This is the ninth official release.




3.1.6 UMPT Added the description of UMPTb1.


08 (2012-12-30)This is the eighth official release.




2



7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable Modified the exterior and length of the BBUinterconnection signal cable connectingWBBPf to WBBPf.

7.2.3 BBU Power Cable Added the description of the cablescomplying with British Standards (BS).


07 (2012-11-08)

This is the seventh official release.

Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:

l 3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications

l DCDU-12B



5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C) Cabinet

Changed the requirements for the upper-levelcircuit breakers and power cables when theDBS3900 is installed outdoors with DCpower supplied and the BBU is installed inthe TMC11H (Ver.C).5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed

in the APM30H (Ver.D)

3.1.6 UMPT Changed the description of indicators on theUMPT.

2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios withAC Power Supply

All information about the APM30H (Ver.D1)and TMC11H (Ver.D1) is deleted.

2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios withDC Power Supply

4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Usedby the DBS3900

4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by theDBS3900

4.3 Engineering Specifications of VariousCabinets Used by the DBS3900

4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, andBattery Cabinet



3


5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installedin the APM30H (Ver.D)

5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installedin the APM30H (Ver.D)

6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed inthe APM30H (Ver.D)

Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), the following infomation is deleted from this issue:

l Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D1)

l Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D1)

06 (2012-09-15)

This is the sixth official release.

Compared with issue 05 (2012-08-05), this issue includes the following new information:

l 5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)l 5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)l 6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)l Power cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H

(Ver.D1)

l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)l Monitoring cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H

(Ver.D1)

l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)l 4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)l 7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable



2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios withAC Power Supply

Added the application scenario of theDBS3900 using the APM30H(Ver.D),TMC11H(Ver.D), and OMB(Ver.C)cabinets.Added the exteriors, configurations,engineering specifications, components,configurations of the Upper-Level circuitbreakers and power cables, powerdistribution schemes, monitoring system,power cable connections, and monitoringsignal cable connections of the BTS3900

2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios withDC Power Supply

4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Usedby the DBS3900

4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by theDBS3900



4


4.3 Engineering Specifications of VariousCabinets Used by the DBS3900

using the APM30H(Ver.D), TMC11H(Ver.D), and OMB(Ver.C) cabinets.

4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, andBattery Cabinet

5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, orIFS06

7.2.3 BBU Power Cable Added the BBU power cable when the powerdevice is EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05.


05 (2012-08-05)This is the fifth official release.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-06-29), this issue includes the following new information:l 4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack



3.1.10 LBBP Added the information of combinedbandwidths.

3.1.14 UTRP Deleted the UTRPb4 used in LTE mode.

3.1.7 GTMU Added the TRX specifications of the board.


04 (2012-06-29)This is the fourth official release.



5




3.1.15 USCU Added the information of the USCUb14 andthe USCUb22.

7.2.3 BBU Power Cable Added the length of the cables.

7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable

7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable

FE/GE Ethernet Cable

7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable


03 (2012-06-20)

This is the third official release.




3.1.9 WBBP Added the description of silkscreens on theboards.

3.1.10 LBBP

3.1.15 USCU

5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C) Cabinet

Added the maximum power of the RRUs.


02 (2012-04-25)

This is the second official release.



6




3.1.5 WMPT Changed the description of the indicators onthe boards.

3.1.6 UMPT

3.1.7 GTMU

3.1.8 LMPT

3.1.9 WBBP

3.1.11 FAN

3.1.12 UPEU

3.1.14 UTRP

3.1.15 USCU

3.1.17 UCIU

3.1.10 LBBP

3.1.16 UBRI


01 (2012-03-20)

This is the first official release.

Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue does not include any new information.

Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue includes the following changes:


3.1.10 LBBP Added the cell bandwidth supported by theLBBPd.

7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable Changed the exterior of the inter-BBU signalcable.

Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), no information is deleted from this issue.

Draft A (2012-02-10)

This is a draft.



7

Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following newinformation:

l Engineering Specifications of the DBS3900

l 4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinetl HEUAl AC Surge Protection Boxl Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Stationl Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Stationl Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-

Transmission Model Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-

Transmission Model Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate

Transmission Model Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate

Transmission Model Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Stationl Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Stationl 7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connectionsl 7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cablel 7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stationsl 7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenancel 3.2 RRUl 3.1.6 UMPTl Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet

l Configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in 5.1.6 ApplicationScenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet

l Power distribution scheme in 5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using theTP48600A Cabinet

l Monitoring scheme in 6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600ACabinet

l Power cable connections in Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600Al Monitoring signal cable connections in Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the

TP48600A Cabinet

Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the followingchanges:


Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks Added the exteriors of the OMB, IMB03, andIFS06.



8


3.1.9 WBBP Added the description of the WBBPf.

3.1.10 LBBP Added the description of the LBBPd.

3.1.15 USCU Changed the names of the USCUb11,USCUb12, and USCUb21.

3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment Added the slot assignment rules for theboards in BBU0 and BBU1 in the GU+UL(BBUs cascaded) scenario.

CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS+LTE Base Station

Added the CPRI cable connections in theCPRI MUX topology.

Configurations of Cabinets Used by theDBS3900

Added the configurations of the TP48600Acabinet.

6.7 Customized Alarm Input Added the customized alarm input when theDBS3900 uses the TP48600A cabinet.

Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, no information is deleted from thisissue.



9

2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900Cabinet

About This Chapter

The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in thecabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.

2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 issupplied with AC power.

2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 issupplied with DC power.

2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenario where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with ACpower supply.

2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 issupplied with DC power.

DBS3900Hardware Description 2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet


10

2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 issupplied with AC power.

Table 2-1 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is suppliedwith AC power.

Table 2-1 Installation scenarios

BBU Installation Position Scenario Description Remarks

APM30H (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in anAPM30H (Ver.C) and theRRUs are installed remotely.The APM30H (Ver.C)supplies power to the BBUand RRUs.

The same configurationprinciples are used for theDBS3900 of which the BBUis installed in an APM30H(Ver.B) and the DBS3900 ofwhich the BBU is installed inan APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet.For details, see BBUInstalled in an APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)Cabinet, which uses anAPM30H (Ver.C) as anexample.

APM30H (Ver.B) The BBU is installed in anAPM30H (Ver.B) and RRUsare installed remotely. TheAPM30H (Ver.B) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

APM30H (Ver.D) BBU 0 is installed in anAPM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 isinstalled in an APM30H(Ver.D) or TMC11H(Ver.D), and RRUs areinstalled remotely. TheAPM30H (Ver.D) orTMC11H (Ver.D) suppliespower to the BBU, and theAPM30H (Ver.D) suppliespower to RRUs.

BBU Installed in anAPM30H (Ver.D) orTMC11H (Ver.D)

APM30H (Ver.A) The BBU is installed in anAPM30H (Ver.A) and RRUsare installed remotely. TheAPM30H (Ver.A) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

The same configurationprinciples are used for theDBS3900 of which the BBUis installed in an APM30H(Ver.A) and the DBS3900 ofwhich the BBU is installed inan APM30 cabinet. Fordetails, see Scenario Wherethe BBU Is Installed in anAPM30H (Ver.A)/APM30,which uses an APM30H(Ver.A) as an example.

APM30 The BBU is installed in anAPM30 and the RRUs areinstalled remotely. TheAPM30 supplies power to theBBU and RRUs.



11


TP48600A The BBU is installed in aTP48600A and the RRUs areinstalled remotely. TheTP48600A supplies power tothe BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in aTP48600A Cabinet

OMB The BBU is installed in anOMB and the RRUs areinstalled remotely. The OMBsupplies power to the BBUand RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in anOMB (Ver.C) and the RRUsare installed remotely. TheOMB (Ver.C) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB(Ver.C)

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE

APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are referred to as APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H(Ver.C)are referred to as TMC11H.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30Hcabinet are as follows:l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.l An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of six RRUs.l An APM30H supports only one TMC11H and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or

IBBS200Ts.l A maximum of 6 RRU power cables and 12 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out

from an APM30H.l An APM30H or TMC11H cabinet can be installed on the ground or stacked on an

IBBS200D or IBBS200T.l An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked

under a TMC11H.l During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right, and auxiliary

cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on the left. Ifboth the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet ispositioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked onthe battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If spaceis insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets in the reverseway of the base station deployment scenario.



12

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe APM30H cabinet. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. TheBBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left side.

Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station withdifferent backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity

Space forCustomerEquipment

CarrierConfiguration

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or220 V AC

Nobackuppower

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

ThenumberofIBBS200Ds orIBBS200Ts is thesame asthat ofAPM30Hs in theinitialconfiguration

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

ThenumberofIBBS200Ds orIBBS200Ts is twotimes thatofAPM30Hs in theinitialconfiguration

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts



13

When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-modebase station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power

When the number of storage battery cabinets are the same as the number of APM30Hs in theinitial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode basestation in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurationsare shown in Figure 2-2.



14

Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof storage battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

When the number of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initialconfiguration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station inthe case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shownin Figure 2-3.



15

Figure 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the mainAPM30H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H, which is onthe right side.

Table 2-3 describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with differentbackup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station

Power Supply BackupPowerCapacity



CabinetConfiguration

110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs

≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

The numberofIBBS200Ds

≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts



16





orIBBS200Tsis the same asthat ofAPM30Hs inthe initialconfiguration

≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

The numberofIBBS200DsorIBBS200Tsis two timesthat ofAPM30Hs inthe initialconfiguration

≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+4IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode basestation in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure2-4.

Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power



17

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initialconfiguration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case ofdifferent space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure2-5.

Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Dsor IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initialconfiguration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case ofdifferent space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure2-6.



18

Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Dsor IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE

APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30Hcabinet are as follows:l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.l An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.l An APM30H supports only one TMC11H cabinet and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or

IBBS200Ts.l A maximum of 12 RRU power cables and 24 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out

from an APM30H.l An APM30H or TMC11H cabinet can be installed on the ground or stacked on an

IBBS200D or IBBS200T.l An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked

under a TMC11H.l During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right side, and

auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on



19

the left side. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the batterycabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet isstacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions andnew cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion.

A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can beconnected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24groups of 2-wire fiber optical cables. When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs,another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H.

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe APM30H.

When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-modebase station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in theinitial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode basestation with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in the following figure.



20

Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base stationdeployment

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initialconfiguration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base stationwith different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurationsare shown in the following figure.



21

Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in theinitial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode basestation with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in the following figure.



22

Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base stationdeployment

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base stationwith different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment,and carrier configurations.


PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity

SpaceforCustomerEquipment



110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower.

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

≤ 4 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)



23

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




≤ 15 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1TMC11H

The numberofIBBS200Ds orIBBS200Tsis the sameas thenumber ofAPM30Hsin the initialconfiguration.

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 4 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 15 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

l ThenumberofIBBS200Ds orIBBS200Ts istwicethenumberofAPM30Hs in theinitialconfiguration.

l ThenumberofIBBS700Ds orIBBS700Ts isthesame asthenumberof

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 4 U ≤ 12RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T



24

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




APM30Hsduringbasestationdeployment.

≤ 15 U ≤ 12RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

NOTE

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial siteconstruction, and the site is configured with more than six RRUs, the IBBS200D or IBBS200T must beconfigured with at least two battery packs consisting of 92 Ah storage batteries to avoid overcurrent of asingle battery pack during the discharging.

Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The BBUs are installed as follows:l When two BBUs are configured in the initial site construction, the BBUs are installed in

an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.l During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU

is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

When a triple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in theposition of BBU0 in the following figure.

When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode basestation with different requirements of space required for customer equipment are shown in thefollowing figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new sitedeployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.



25

Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in theinitial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations areshown in the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenariosof new site deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.



26

Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initialconfiguration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with differentrequirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown inthe following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new sitedeployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.



27

Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in theinitial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations areshown in the following figure.



28

Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, andcarrier configurations.


PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower.

≤ 2 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

≤ 13 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1TMC11H

The number ofIBBS200Dsor IBBS200Tsis the same asthe number of

≤ 2 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T



29

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




APM30Hs inthe initialconfiguration.

≤ 13 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

l Thenumber ofIBBS200Ds orIBBS200Ts is twicethenumber ofAPM30Hsin theinitialconfiguration.

l Thenumber ofIBBS700Ds orIBBS700Ts is thesame asthenumber ofAPM30Hsin theinitialconfiguration.

≤ 2 U ≤ 12RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 13 U ≤ 12RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.A)/APM30NOTE

l In this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A).

l The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single- or dual-mode scenario.

l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.

l A single APM can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.

l A single APM can be installed together with only one TMC and a maximum of oneintegrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectriccooling unit.



30

l A maximum of six power cables and twelve dual-wire fiber optic cables can be led outfrom a single APM.

l An APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on a battery cabinet.

l A BBC or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked belowa TMC. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. The BBC or IBBS200T is stacked belowthe TMC.

l During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and auxiliarycabinets such as the battery cabinet and TMC, if required, are positioned on the left. If boththe battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positionedon the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinetor positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.

l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In aspecial scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverseway of the base station deployment scenario.

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe APM. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed inthe basic APM, which is on the left.







110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM+1 TMC

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs+1TMC

0.5 h or 2 h ≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM+1 BBC/IBBS

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM+1 BBC/IBBS+1 TMC

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs+2BBCs/IBBSs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APMs+2BBCs/IBBSs+1TMC



31

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipmentand carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris not required

When 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is required, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-modebase station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shownin Figure 2-16.



32

Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when 0.5 h or 2 hbackup power is required

BBU Installed in a TP48600A CabinetThe principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TP48600Acabinet are as follows:l A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet side by

side.l A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with an IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet side

by side.l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.l A TP48600A can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.

In a single- or dual-mode base station, one BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the directcurrent distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) in the equipment compartment. Table 2-7 lists thecabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements forbackup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.



33


PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No storagebatterycabinet isconfiguredin the initialconfiguration

≤ 5 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A

≤ 16 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H(Ver.C)

The numberofIBBS700DsorIBBS700Tsis the sameas that ofTP48600Asin the initialconfiguration

≤ 5 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/IBBS700D

≤ 16 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/IBBS700D+1 TMC11H(Ver.C)

When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required forcustomer equipment are shown in Figure 2-17.



34

Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storagebattery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration

When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initialconfiguration, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case ofdifferent space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-18.



35

Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the numberof IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration

In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required. BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space underthe DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment, and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space underBBU 0. Table 2-8 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with differentrequirements for backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.


PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No storagebatterycabinet isconfiguredin the initialconfiguration

≤ 5 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A

≤ 16 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H(Ver.C)



36

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




The numberofIBBS700DsorIBBS700Tsis the sameas that ofTP48600Asin the initialconfiguration

≤ 5 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/IBBS700D

≤ 16 U ≤ 12RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/IBBS700D+1 TMC11H(Ver.C)

When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customerequipment are shown in Figure 2-19.

Figure 2-19 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with backup power of 48 Vand 300 Ah



37

When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initialconfiguration, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-20.

Figure 2-20 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number ofIBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration

BBU Installed in an OMBThe principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB are asfollows:l An OMB supplies power to an RRU.l An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.

The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shownin Figure 2-21.



38

Figure 2-21 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)are as follows:

l An OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of six RRUs.

l An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.

The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)is shown in Figure 2-22.

Figure 2-22 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB(Ver.C)

2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 issupplied with DC power.

Table 2-9 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is suppliedwith DC power.



39



TMC11H (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in aTMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUsare installed remotely. TheTMC11H (Ver.C) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

The same installation methodis used for the DBS3900 ofwhich the BBU is installed ina TMC11H (Ver.B) and theDBS3900 of which the BBUis installed in a TMC11H(Ver.C). For details, see BBUInstalled in a TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)Cabinet, which uses aTMC11H (Ver.C) as anexample.

TMC11H (Ver.B) The BBU is installed in aTMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUsare installed remotely. TheTMC11H (Ver.B) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

TMC11H (Ver.D) The BBU is installed in aTMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUsare installed remotely. TheTMC11H (Ver.D) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in aTMC11H (Ver.D)

TMC11H (Ver.A) The BBU is installed in aTMC11H (Ver.A) and RRUsare installed remotely. TheTMC11H (Ver.A) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

The same configurationprinciples are used for theDBS3900 of which the BBUis installed in a TMC11H(Ver.A) and the DBS3900 ofwhich the BBU is installed ina TMC. For details, seeScenario Where the BBU IsInstalled in a TMC11H(Ver.A)/TMC, which uses aTMC11H (Ver.A) as anexample.

TMC The BBU is installed in aTMC and the RRUs areinstalled remotely. The TMCsupplies power to the BBUand RRUs.

APM30H (Ver.B) suppliedwith +24 V DC power

The BBU is installed in anAPM30H (Ver.B) suppliedwith +24 V DC power andRRUs are installed remotely.The APM30H (Ver.B)supplies power to the BBUand RRUs.

BBU Installed in anAPM30H (Ver.B) CabinetSupplied with +24 V DCPower

OMB The BBU is installed in anOMB and the RRUs areinstalled remotely. The OMBsupplies power to the BBUand RRUs.




40


OMB (Ver.C) The BBU is installed in anOMB (Ver.C) and the RRUsare installed remotely. TheOMB (Ver.C) suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB(Ver.C)

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE

TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C) are referred to as TMC11H.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinetare as follows:l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.l A single TMC11H can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.l A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single

TMC11H.l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the

future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If spaceis insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse wayof the base station deployment scenario.

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe TMC11H cabinet.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown inTable 2-10.


PowerSupply




-48 V DC ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)

≤ 8 U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown inFigure 2-23.



41

Figure 2-23 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DCscenario

Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installedin the main TMC11H cabinet, which is on the left. BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11Hcabinet, which is on the right.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Table 2-11.


Power Supply Space forCustomerEquipment



-48 V DC ≤ 18 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 TMC11Hs

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 2-24.

Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE

TMC11H (Ver.D) is referred to as TMC11H.



42

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinetare as follows:

l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.

l A single TMC11H can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.

l A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a singleTMC11H.

l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If spaceis insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse wayof the base station deployment scenario.

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe TMC11H cabinet.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown inTable 2-12.


PowerSupply




-48 V DC ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)

≤ 8 U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)



Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, and the BBUs are installed as follows:



43

l In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in aTMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment isinstalled in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).

l In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, theBBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input).Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Table 2-13.





-48 V DC ≤ 6 U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC11H (with twoDCDUs)

≤ 17 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 TMC11Hs (with twoDCDUs)

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 2-26. In Figure 2-26, illustrations a and b show the site deployment scenarioand illustration c shows the capacity expansion scenario, respectively.

Figure 2-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario



44

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.A)/TMCNOTE

In this section, the TMC is TMC or TMC11H (Ver. A).

l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.l A single TMC can provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.l A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single

TMC.l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the

future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In aspecial scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverseway of the base station deployment scenario.

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe TMC. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two TMCs are required. The BBU is installed inthe basic TMC, which is on the left.







-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 TMC (withone DCDU)

≤ 8 U ≤ 12 RRUs 1 TMC (withtwo DCDUs)





45

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Cabinet Supplied with +24 V DC Power

When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with +24 VDC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.

Table 2-15 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with+24 V DC power.





+24 V DC ≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs 1 APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)

Figure 2-28 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station suppliedwith +24 V DC power.

Figure 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the +24 V DCscenario

Table 2-16 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with+24 V DC power.





+24 V DC ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B, +24 V)

When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 2-29.



46

Figure 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC scenario


The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB are asfollows:

l An OMB supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of three RRUs.


The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shownin Figure 2-30.

Figure 2-30 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)are as follows:

l An OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of six RRUs.


The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)is shown in Figure 2-31.



47

Figure 2-31 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB(Ver.C)

2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenario where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with ACpower supply.

Table 2-17 lists the scenarios where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with ACpower supply.


BBUInstallationPosition

Scenario Description Reference

IMB03 The BBU is installed in an IMB03and the RRUs are installed remotely.The IMB03 supplies power to theBBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an IMB03

IFS06 The BBU is installed in an IMB03.The IMB03 and RRUs are installedin an IFS06.

For details, see the DBS3900 (ICR)Installation Guide.

BBU Installed in an IMB03When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided, a BBU can be installed in an IMB03 and anRRU can be remotely installed. In this scenario, the IMB03 supplies power to the BBU andRRU, as shown in Figure 2-32.



48

Figure 2-32 BBU installed in an IMB03

2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power SupplyThis section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 issupplied with DC power.

Table 2-18 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is suppliedwith DC power.




19-inch rack The BBU and the DCDU-03B orDCDU-11B are installed in a 19-inchrack, and the RRUs are remotelyinstalled outdoors. The DCDU-03Bor DCDU-11B supplies power to theBBU and outdoor RRUs.

BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

Wall The BBU and DCDU-03B orDCDU-11B are installed on a wall,and the RRUs are remotely installedoutdoors. The DCDU-03B orDCDU-11B supplies power to theBBU and outdoor RRUs.

BBU installed on a wall



49



Indoor The BBU is installed indoors. RRUsare remotely installed outdoors. TheAPM30H (Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)supplies power only to the RRUs andmonitors only the RRUs.

BBU Installed Indoors and RRUsInstalled Outdoors (Powered byan APM30H)

IMB03 The BBU is installed in an IMB03and the RRUs are installed remotelyoutdoors. The IMB03 suppliespower to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU installed in an IMB03

IFS06 The BBU is installed in an IMB03.The IMB03 and RRUs are installedin an IFS06.

For details, see the DBS3900 (ICR)Installation Guide.

BBU Installed in a 19-Inch RackWhen -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B can be installedin a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03Bor DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

Figure 2-33 lists the configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station.



50

Figure 2-33 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Figure 2-34 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station.



51

Figure 2-34 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station

BBU installed on a wallWhen -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B can be installedindoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03Bor DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in Figure 2-35.



52

Figure 2-35 BBU installed on a wall

BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installedoutdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),APM30H (Ver.D). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D) can besupplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. Figure 2-36 shows the installation scenarios.

Figure 2-36 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors



53

BBU installed in an IMB03When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies powerto the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-37 BBU installed in an IMB03



54

3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900

About This Chapter

This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.

3.1 BBU3900This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 andtheir panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

3.2 RRUThe Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antennasystem.

3.3 SLPUThe signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.

3.4 WGRUThe WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning informationand clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clocksignals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPSpositioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each basestation can be configured with a WGRU.

3.5 EMUAThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinetand reports related alarms.

DBS3900Hardware Description 3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900


55

3.1 BBU3900This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 andtheir panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.

3.1.1 BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.

The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is usedduring base station commissioning.

l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mountingear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 ESN (1)

l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear ofthe BBU, as shown in Figure 3-3.



56

Figure 3-3 ESN (2)

3.1.2 BBU3900 FunctionsThe BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station.

The BBU3900 performs the following functions:l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

l Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configurationdata can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.

l Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operateand maintain the base station.

l Processes uplink and downlink data.l Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.l Provides the system clock.

NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning thebase station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, which include capacity,transmission ports, input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmentspecifications, and surge protection specifications.

For details about technical specifications of a BBU3900, see section "BBU3900 TechnicalSpecifications" in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot AssignmentThis section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios:BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short),BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L(BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L(UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).



57

Slots in the BBU3900Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Slots in the BBU3900

BBU3900 GSMTable 3-1 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.

Table 3-1 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It must beconfigured inslot 6, with bothslots 5 and 6occupied.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It must beconfigured inslot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is referentiallyconfigured inslot 1.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).



58


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UCIU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 3-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM.

Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM

BBU3900 UMTSTable 3-2 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.

Table 3-2 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPTor WMPT ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.



59


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more

CPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3 or 2.

l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, 2,4, or 5.

The slotassignmentprinciples forthe WBBPboards are asfollows:l The WBBPd

or WBBPf ispreferentially configuredin slot 3 or 2.The WBBPftakesprecedenceover theWBBPd inslotassignment.

l If five ormoreWBBPs arerequired,ensure that aWBBP is



60


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

installed ineach of slots2 and 3. Atleast one ofthe WBBPsin slots 2 and3 is WBBPdor WBBPf.

l If both slots2 and 3 areoccupied bythe WBBPaor WBBPbboards,exchangeboards toensure thatthe WBBPdor WBBPf isconfiguredin slot 3 or 2.

l If theWBBPf4 isinstalled inthe sameBBU as theWBBPf1,WBBPf2,andWBBPf3,the WBBPf4ispreferentially installed inslots 2 and 3.






61


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or6

A single UTRPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 4. If moreUTRPs arerequired, theUTRP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,or 6.If severalUTRPs areconfigured, thepriority of themas following:UTRPc,UTRP6,UTRP9,UTRP2,UTRP3/UTRP4

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1.Whenconfigured withtwo satellitecards, it isconfigured inslot 1 (with bothslots 0 and 1occupied).

Figure 3-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS.



62

Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS

BBU3900 LTETable 3-3 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.

Table 3-3 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single LMPTor UMPT ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,4, or 5.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.



63


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction




USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5. A USCUthat occupies 1U space isconfigured inslot 5 (with bothslots 5 and 4occupied).If slots 4 and 5are occupied, aUSCU ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1, or aUSCU that usesa dual-satellitecard isconfigured inslot 1, with bothslots 1 and 0occupied.

Figure 3-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE.

Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE



64

BBU3900 GUTable 3-4 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.

Table 3-4 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 The WMPT orUMPT isconfigured onlyin slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).



65


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction



l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, 2,or 4.

If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3 or 2.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat a WBBP isinstalled in eachof slots 2 and 3.At least one ofthe WBBPs inslots 2 and 3 isWBBPd orWBBPf.The WBBPftakesprecedence overthe WBBPdduring slotassignment.



66


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction




UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inUMTS modeduring slotassignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.


Figure 3-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU.

Figure 3-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU

BBU3900 GLTable 3-5 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.



67

Table 3-5 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.


LBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,or 4.




UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.



68


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.


Figure 3-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL.

Figure 3-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL

BBU3900 ULTable 3-6 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.

Table 3-6 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6.

WMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.



69


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or5

A single LBBPis configuredonly in slot 2. Ifmore LBBPs arerequired, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,or 5.

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or5

A single WBBPis configuredonly in slot 3. Ifmore WBBPsare required, theWBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,or 5.If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isconfigured onlyin slot 3.The WBBP,which providesa maximum ofsix CPRI ports,is configured ineither slot 2 orslot 3.






70


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inUMTS modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.

Figure 3-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL.

Figure 3-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL

BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting theGU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supportingthe LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting theGL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).



71

BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supportingthe UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).

BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)Table 3-7 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GUmode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).

Table 3-7 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction





72


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction



l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, or2.

If a WBBPd isrequired, it isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3 or 2.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat two WBBPsare installed inslots 2 and 3. Atleast one of thetwo WBBPs isWBBPd.






73


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction




UCIU Mandatory 1 Slot 0, Slot 1,Slot 4, or slot 5

The UCIU isinstalled indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, or1.

Table 3-8 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTEmode.



MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPTis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,4, or 5.




74


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction




USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5. A USCUthat occupies 1U space isconfigured inslot 5 (with bothslots 5 and 4occupied).If slots 4 and 5are occupied, aUSCU ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1, or aUSCU that usesa dual-satellitecard isconfigured inslot 1, with bothslots 1 and 0occupied.

NOTE

The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.

BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)Table 3-9 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GLmode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).



75



MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

LMPT/UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.The UMPT andWMPT cannotbe configuredsimultaneously.The UMPTmust beconfigured asthe main controlboard in theUCIU+UMPTcascadingscenario.


LBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.If more LBBPsare required, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 1, 2, or0.






76


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.





Table 3-10 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting theUMTS mode.



77



MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single UMPTis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.



78


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction



l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, 2,4, or 5.




79


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction




UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or6

A single UTRPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 4. If moreUTRPs arerequired, theUTRP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,or 6.


NOTE


BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)Table 3-11 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GUmode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).



80



MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction





81


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more


l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder ofpriority, inslot 3, 0, 1, or2.




82


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction




UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 0.The UTRP inGSM modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inUMTS modeduring slotassignment.





Table 3-12 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.



83

Table 3-12 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction

UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6.

UMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or5

A single LBBPis configuredonly in slot 2. Ifmore LBBPs arerequired, theLBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,or 5.

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or5

A single WBBPis configuredonly in slot 3. Ifmore WBBPsare required, theWBBP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,or 5.If a WBBPd orWBBPf isrequired, it isconfigured onlyin slot 3.The WBBP,which providesa maximum ofsix CPRI ports,is configured ineither slot 2 orslot 3.




84


MaximumNumber

Slot Restriction



UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The UTRP inUMTS modetakesprecedence overthe UTRP inLTE modeduring slotassignment.


NOTE


3.1.5 WMPTThe WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for theBBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

SpecificationsTable 3-13 lists the WMPT specifications.

Table 3-13 WMPT specifications

Board ApplicableMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

WMPT UMTS ATM overE1/T1 or IPover E1/T1

1 Fourchannels

Full-duplex



85


Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

Transmission over FEoptical ports

1 10 Mbit/sand 100Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FEelectricalports


Full-duplex

NOTE

For the combined signaling specifications of the WMPT, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900Series Base Station Technical Description.

Panel

Figure 3-11 shows the panel of the WMPT.

Figure 3-11 WMPT panel

Functions

The WMPT performs the following functions:

l Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management,performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, andprovides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.

l Provides a reference clock for the system.

l Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.

l Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration datacan be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.

l Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP.

l Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.

Indicators

Table 3-14 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.



86

Table 3-14 Indicators on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen Color Status Description

RUN Green Steady on There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board isfunctioning properly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

l Data or softwareis being loaded tothe board.

l The board is notstarted.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm isgenerated, and theboard must bereplaced.

Steady off The board is runningproperly.


An alarm isgenerated and youneed to locate thefault before decidingwhether to replacethe board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves asan active board.

Steady off l The board doesnot serve as anactive board.

l The board has notbeen activated.

l The board is notproviding anyservices.


The operation andmaintenance link(OML) isdisconnected.



87



The board is beingtested, such as anRRU VoltageStanding Wave Ratio(VSWR) test througha USB(2)(3) flashdrive.

In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, whichindicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioningEthernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they areat both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel

Table 3-15 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-15 Port status indicators

Indicator Color Status Description

FE1 optical portstatus indicators

Green (LINK on theleft side)

Steady on The connection is setup successfully.

Steady off No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT on theright side)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived.

FE0 electrical portstatus indicators

Green (LINK on theleft side)




88






ETH port indicators Green (LINK on theleft side)






PortsTable 3-16 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.

Table 3-16 Ports on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen Connector Description

E1/T1 port DB26 female connector E1/T1 port

FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port

FE1 SFP female connector FE optical port

GPS SMA connector Reserved

ETH(1) RJ45 connector Commissioning

TST(2) USB connector USB commissioning port

USB(3) USB connector USB loading port

RST - Used for resetting the WMPT



89

NOTE

(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened andthe user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.

(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the basestation configuration.

(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

DIP Switch

The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in differentmodes. Figure 3-13 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Figure 3-13 DIP switch settings of the WMPT

Table 3-17 and Table 3-18 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.

Table 3-17 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1

OFF OFF ON ON The E1resistance isset to 120ohm.

ON ON ON ON The E1resistance isset to 75 ohm.



90

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

Others Unavailable

Table 3-18 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced

ON ON ON ON Imbalanced

Others Unavailable

3.1.6 UMPTThe universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and managesresources on other boards in the BBU3900.

NOTE

UMPTb1 is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC370 and later versions.

Specifications of the UMPT

The UMPT is classified into four types: UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table3-19 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6.

Table 3-19 Specifications of the UMPT


Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

UMPTa1/UMPTb1

UMTS ATM overE1/T1 or IPover E1/T1

1 Fourchannels

-

Transmission over FE/GE electricalports

1 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,or 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FE/GE opticalports

1 100 Mbit/s or1000 Mbit/s

Full- or half-duplex



91


Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

UMPTa2/UMPTa6

LTE IP over E1/T1

1 Fourchannels

-


1 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,or 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

Transmission over FE/GE opticalports

1 100 Mbit/s or1000 Mbit/s

Full- or half-duplex

The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 workingin LTE mode.

Table 3-20 Signaling specifications

Board Signaling Specifications (CAPS)

UMPTa2/UMPTa6 60

The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum numberof users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.

Table 3-21 Data radio bearer specifications

Board Maximum Number of Users

UMPTa2/UMPTa6 10800

The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the UMPTa2/UMPTa6 working inLTE mode is three times the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode.

NOTE

For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB or NodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of data radio bearers andRRC_connected users, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station TechnicalDescription.

Panel

Figure 3-14, Figure 3-16, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-17 show the panels of the UMPT boards.



92

Figure 3-14 UMPTa1 Panel

Figure 3-15 UMPTb1 Panel



NOTE

In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1,UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.

FunctionsThe UMPT performs the following functions:

l Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.

l Controls all boards in the system.l Provides the reference clock for the entire system.



93

l Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) referenceclock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.

l Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliancewith Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-PointProtocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.

Ports

Table 3-22 describes the ports on the UMPT.

Table 3-22 Ports on the UMPT


FE/GE1 SFP femaleconnector

A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernetoptical port is used for transmitting service dataand signaling messages.

FE/GE0 RJ45 connector A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptiveEthernet electrical port is used for transmittingservice data and signaling messages.

USB(1) USB connector The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used forthe software upgrade of a base station using a USBflash driver. This port also functions as acommissioning Ethernet port(2).The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functionsas the TOD clock or test clock port.

E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector

The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs andoutputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1lightning protection unit (UELP) or between basestation controllers.

GPS SMA connector The GPS port on the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, orUMPTa2 is reserved.The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used fortransmitting radio frequency (RF) signalsreceived from the antenna to the satellite card.

CI SFP femaleconnector

The port is used for BBU interconnection.

RST - The port is used to reset the board.

NOTE


(2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been openedand the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port beforeaccessing the base station through the USB port.



94

IndicatorsTable 3-23 describes the indicators on the UMPT.

Table 3-23 Indicators on the UMPT







l The board isbeing loaded orconfigured.


ALM Red Steady on An alarm isgenerated, and theboard needs to bereplaced.



An alarm isgenerated, and youneed to locate thefault before decidingwhether to replacethe board.







95



The operation andmaintenance link(OML) isdisconnected.


The board is beingtested, such as anRRU VoltageStanding Wave Ratio(VSWR) test througha USB(1) flash drive.NOTE

Of UMPT boards,only the UMPTa1 hasthis status.

In every 4s, theindicator is on for0.125s and off for0.125s (eight times)in the first 2s and thenoff for 2s.

l All cellscorresponding tothe subrack thathouses this boardare not activated.

l The S1 link isfaulty.

NOTEOf UMPT boards,only the UMPTa2 andUMPTa6 have thisstatus.

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status ofthe FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. Theindicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure3-18.

Figure 3-18 Indicators for ports

Table 3-24 describes the indicators.



96

Table 3-24 Indicators for ports

Indicator/Silkscreen

Color Status Definition

LINK (silkscreen forthe optical port)

Green Steady on The connection isnormal.

Steady off The connection isabnormal.

ACT (silkscreen forthe optical port)

Orange Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted.

LINK (silkscreen forthe electrical port)

Green Steady on The connection isnormal.

Steady off The connection isabnormal.

ACT (silkscreen forthe electrical port)

Orange Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted.

CI Red or green Steady green The interconnectionlink is normal.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receivesignals because ofone of the followingreasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The optical cable

is broken.



97



Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

Cables are connectedin one of followingincorrect manners:l In the UCIU

+UMPT scenario,the S0 port on theUCIU isconnected to theCI port on theUMPT.Indicators for theS0 and CI portsare blinking.

l The ports areconnected in ringtopology.Indicators for allincorrectlyconnected portsare blinking.

Steady off The optical modulecannot be detected.

R0, R1, R2 Red or green - Reserved

L01 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 0 and 1 isnot set up, or an LOSalarm is generated.

Steady green E1/T1 links 0 and 1are workingproperly.

Blinking green (onfor 1s and off for 1s)

E1/T1 link 0 isworking properly,but E1/T1 link 1 isnot set up or an LOSalarm is generated.

Blinking green (onfor 0.125s and off for0.125s)


Steady red Alarms are generatedon E1/T1 links 0 and1.



98



Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

An alarm isgenerated on E1/T1link 0.



L23 Red or green Steady off E1/T1 link 2 and 3 isnot set up, or an LOSalarm is generated.

Steady green E1/T1 links 2 and 3are workingproperly.



Blinking green (onfor 0.125s and off for0.125s)


Steady red Alarms are generatedon E1/T1 links 2 and3.





DIP SwitchTwo DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-19 shows the positionsof DIP switches on the UMPT.



99

Figure 3-19 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT

Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:

l SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-25 describes the DIP switch.l SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-26 describes the

DIP switch.

Table 3-25 DIP switch SW1

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON Reserved Reserved The E1 resistance is set to75 ohms.

OFF ON The E1 resistance is set to120 ohms.

ON OFF The T1 resistance is set to100 ohms.

Table 3-26 DIP switch SW2

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4


ON ON ON ON Unbalanced

3.1.7 GTMUThe GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission andcontrol function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, andexternal alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.



100

SpecificationsThe GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-27 lists the transmissionspecifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-27 Transmission specifications of the GTMU

Board SupportedMode

Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

GTMU/GTMUb

GSM TDM overE1/T1

1 Fourchannels

Full-duplex

Transmission over FEoptical ports


Full-duplex

Transmission over FEelectricalports


Full-duplex

Table 3-28 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Table 3-28 TRX specifications of the GTMU

Board Supported Mode TransmissionMode

Maximum CarrierNumber

GTMU GSM TDM 72

IP over FE or IP overE1

36

GTMUb GSM TDM 126

IP over FE 60

IP over E1 48

PanelFigure 3-20 and Figure 3-21 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Figure 3-20 GTMU panel



101

Figure 3-21 GTMUb panel

Functions

The GTMU performs the following functions:

l Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.

l Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, andsecurity management.

l Monitors the fans and power modules.

l Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.

l Provides the clock output for test.

l Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system.

l Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.

l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.

Indicators

Table 3-29 describes the indicators on the GTMU.

Table 3-29 Indicators on the GTMU


RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.


The board is running properly.


Software is being loaded to theboard.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and theboard must be replaced.



102


Steady off There is no fault.


An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as an activeboard.


The OML is disconnected.

Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicatingthe connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioningport. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-30 describes theindicators.

Table 3-30 Indicators for ports


LIU0 to LIU3 Green Steady on An E1/T1 local alarmis generated.


An E1/T1 remotealarm is generated.

Steady off The link isfunctional.

CPRI0 to CPRI5 Red or green Steady green The CPRI link isfunctioning properly.

Steady red An optical modulefails to receive ortransmit signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical

module is faulty.l The fiber optic

cable is broken.



103



The CPRI link is outof lock because of thefollowing reasons:l There is no

mutual lockbetween dual-mode clocksources.

l There ismismatched datarate over CPRIports.

Steady off l The opticalmodule cannot bedetected.

l The CPRI cable isnot connected.

ETH Green (LINKindicator on the leftside)



Orange (ACTindicator on the rightside)



FE0 Green (LINKindicator on the leftside)



Orange (ACTindicator on the rightside)



FE1 (on theGTMUb)

Green (LINKindicator on the leftside)




104



Green (ACTindicator on the rightside)



M_S (on theGTMUb)

- - This is the indicatorfor the reserved port.

EXT (on theGTMUb)

- - This is the indicatorfor the reserved port.

PortsTable 3-31 describes the ports on the GTMU.

Table 3-31 Ports on the GTMU


CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP femaleconnector

Data transmission port interconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the input and output of opticaland electrical transmission signals.

EXT (on theGTMUb)

SFP femaleconnector

Reserved

ETH(1) RJ45 connector Local maintenance and commissioning port

FE0 RJ45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough FE cables to transmit networkinformation

FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough fiber optic cables to transmit networkinformation

TST(2) USB connector Providing reference clock for the test instruments

USB(3) USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through theUSB flash drive

E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector

Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs betweenthe GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

RST - Used for resetting the GTMU



105

NOTE




The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU.

Table 3-32 Specifications of the GTMU ports

Board Number of CPRIPorts

CPRI Data Rate(Gbit/s)

Topo Type

GTMU 6 1.25 Topologies of star,chain, and ring

GTMUb 6 1.25/2.5 Topologies of star,chain, and ring

DIP Switch

On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 andS2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:

l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-33 provides details on the DIP switch.

l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-34 providesdetails on the DIP switch.

l S3 is reserved.

l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-35 provides details on the DIP switch.

l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-36 provides detailson the DIP switch.

Table 3-33 Description on S1

DIPSwitch

DIP Setting Description

1 2 3 4

S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to75 ohm.

OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to120 ohm.

ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to100 ohm.

Others Unavailable



106

NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.


DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF All the bits are set toOFF by default in allmodes.

ON ON ON ON When error codes arereceived over the fourE1 RX links in 75 ohm,all the bits of S2 mustbe set to ON to rectifythe faults on the E1links.

Others Unavailable


DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass

OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1bypass

Others Unavailable


DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1bypass

OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-1 cascadedbase stations



107

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-2 cascadedbase stations

OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-3 cascadedBTSs

ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-4 cascadedBTSs

OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-5 cascadedBTSs

3.1.8 LMPTThe LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system interms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.

SpecificationsTable 3-37 lists the specifications of the LMPT.

Table 3-37 Specifications of the LMPT

Board Mode Transmission Mode

Number ofports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

LMPT LTE Transmission over FE/GE opticalports

2 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,and 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex


2 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s,and 1000Mbit/s

Full-duplex

The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LMPT.



108

Table 3-38 Signaling specifications of the LMPT

Board Signaling Specification (CAPS)

LMPT 30

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode supported bythe LMPT.

Table 3-39 Maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode

Board Maximum RRC_Connected Users

LMPT 5400

The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the LMPT is three times the maximumnumber of RRC_connected users.

NOTE

For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 SeriesBase Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of data radio bearers and RRC_connectedusers, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.

Panel

Figure 3-22 shows the LMPT.

Figure 3-22 LMPT

Functions

The LMPT performs the following functions:

l Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,signaling processing, and radio source management

l Controls all boards in the system

l Provides the system clock

l Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW



109

Indicators

There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-40 describes the indicators on the LMPTpanel and their status.

Table 3-40 Indicators on the LMPT panel


RUN Green Steady on There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

Steady off There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

On for 1s and offfor 1s

The board is functioningproperly.

On for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s

l Software or data is beingloaded to the board.

l The board is not started.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, andthe board needs to bereplaced.


On for 1s and offfor 1s

An alarm is generated andyou need to locate the faultbefore deciding whether toreplace the board.

ACT Green Steady on The board serves as anactive board.

Steady off l The board does notserve as an active board.

l The board has not beenactivated.

l The board is notproviding any services.

On for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s

The OML is disconnected.

In every 4s, theindicator is on for0.125s and off for0.125s (eighttimes) in the first2s and then off for2s.

l All cells correspondingto the subrack thathouses this board are notactivated.

l The S1 link is faulty.



110

Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connectionstatus of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have nosilkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-41 describes the indicators.

Table 3-41 Indicators


SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is setup successfully.


Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.


ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.


Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is setup successfully.


FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) Steady on The connection is setup successfully.


Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived.




111

Ports

Table 3-42 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.

Table 3-42 Ports on the panel of the LMPT

Silkscreen Connector Quantity Description

SFP0 and SFP1 SFP femaleconnector

2 FE/GE optical portconnecting to thetransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment

ETH(1) RJ45 connector 1 Commissioning

TST(2) USB connector 1 Test port

USB(3) USB connector 1 Software loading

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 FE/GE electrical portconnecting to thetransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment

GPS SMA connector 1 GPS port

RST - 1 Used for resetting theLMPT

NOTE




NOTE

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not usedsimultaneously.

SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be usedsimultaneously.

3.1.9 WBBPThe WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

NOTE

WBBPf is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC320 and later versions.



112

Specifications

The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-43.

NOTE

The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.

Table 3-43 Specifications of the WBBP

Board Number of CellsSupported

Number of UL CEs Number of DLCEs

WBBPa 3 128 256

WBBPb1 3 64 64

WBBPb2 3 128 128

WBBPb3 6 256 256

WBBPb4 6 384 384

WBBPd1 6 192 192

WBBPd2 6 384 384

WBBPd3 6 256 256

WBBPf1 6 192 256

WBBPf2 6 256 384

WBBPf3 6 384 512

WBBPf4 6 512 768

NOTE

For the combined signaling specifications of the WBBP, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900Series Base Station Technical Description.

Panel

The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24, Figure 3-25, andFigure 3-26.

Figure 3-23 Panel of the WBBPa



113

Figure 3-24 Panel of the WBBPb

Figure 3-25 Panel of the WBBPd

Figure 3-26 Panel of the WBBPf

NOTE

l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,respectively.

l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, andWBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions

The WBBP performs the following functions:

l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1+1 backup mode.

l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.

l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.

l When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPdsupports the IC of uplink data.

l The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection betweenBBUs.



114

Indicators

There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-44 describes the indicators on theWBBP and their status.

Table 3-44 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status




On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioningproperly.

On for 0.125s and off for0.125s

l Software or data is beingloaded to the board.



Steady off The board is running properly.

On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.


Steady off l The board does not serve asan active board.


l The board is not providingany services.

On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the boardis insufficient.NOTE

Of all types of WBBP boards, onlythe WBBPf has this status.

The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factorPluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPfprovides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFPports.



115

Table 3-45 describes the indicators.

Table 3-45 CPRI port status indicators


CPRIx Red or green Steady green The CPRI link isfunctioning properly.



cable is broken.


The RF moduleconnected to the CPRIlink has a hardwarefault.


The CPRI link is outof lock because offollowing reasons:l There is no mutual

lock between dual-mode clocksources.

l There ismismatched datarate over CPRIports.

l VSWR alarms aregenerated on theRF moduleconnected to theCPRI link whenthe USB(1) flashdrive is used forVSWR test.





116

NOTE

(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning thebase station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.

The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-46 describes this indicator.

Table 3-46 QSFP port status indicators


HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBUtransmission link isfunctional.



cable is broken.


The interconnectionlink is out of lockbecause of thefollowing reasons:l There is no

mutual lockbetween twointerconnectedBBUs.

l There ismismatched datarate over QSFPports.


PortsTable 3-47 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.



117

Table 3-47 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels


CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission portinterconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the inputand output of optical andelectrical transmissionsignals.

Table 3-48 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.

Table 3-48 Ports on the WBBPd panel


CPRI0, CPRI1,CPRI2, CPRI3/EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,CPRI5/EIH2

SFP female connector Data transmission portinterconnected to the RF module.It supports the input and output ofoptical and electricaltransmission signals.

The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-49.

Table 3-49 Ports on the WBBPf panel


CPRIx SFP female connector Data transmission portinterconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the inputand output of optical andelectrical transmissionsignals.

HEI QSFP connector Port interconnected to otherbaseband boards to share thebaseband resources.

3.1.10 LBBPThe LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

SpecificationsThe following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP.



118

Table 3-50 Signaling specifications of the LBBP

Board Signaling Specification (CAPS)

LBBPc 30

LBBPd1/LBBPd2/LBBPd3/LBBPd4 60

The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users supported by the LBBP in LTEFDD scenarios.

Table 3-51 Maximum RRC_connected users

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum RRC_ConnectedUsers

LBBPc 1.4 MHz 1008

3 MHz 1800

5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 1800

15 MHz 1800 (2R)/1200 (4R)

20 MHz 1800 (2R)/1200 (4R)

LBBPd1/LBBPd2 1.4 MHz 504

3 MHz 1080

5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

LBBPd3 1.4 MHz 1008

3 MHz 2160

5 MHz 3600

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users supported by the LBBP in LTETDD scenarios.



119



LBBPc 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 1800

20 MHz 1800(2R)/1200(4R)

LBBPd2 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

LBBPd4 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600



LBBPc 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 1800

20 MHz 1800(2R)/1200(4R)

LBBPd2 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

LBBPd4 5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the LBBP is three times themaximum RRC_connected users.



120

NOTE

For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB, see the section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900Series Base Station Technical Description. For the following specifications, see the section "BasebandSpecifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description: the maximum number of DRBs,maximum RRC_connected users per cell, maximum RRC_connected users supported by an entire basestation, and maximum uplink and downlink throughput per cell or user.

The following table lists the maximum throughput of the LBBP.

Table 3-54 Maximum throughput of the LBBP

Board Maximum Throughput

LBBPc l Downlink: 300 Mbit/sl Uplink: 100 Mbit/s

LBBPd1 l Downlink: 450 Mbit/sl Uplink: 225 Mbit/s




The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supportedby a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.

Table 3-55 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios

Board Number ofCell

Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration

LBBPc 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R3x20 MHz 1T2R3x10 MHz 4T4R3x20 MHz 2T2R1x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd1 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R3x20 MHz 1T2R3x20 MHz 2T2R



121

Board Number ofCell


LBBPd2 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R3x20 MHz 1T2R3x20 MHz 2T2R3x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd3 6 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and10 MHz

6x10M 1T1R6x10M 1T2R6x10M 2T2R

The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supportedby a single LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios.

Table 3-56 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios

Board Number ofCells


LBBPc 3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz 1x20 MHz (4T4R)2x10 MHz (2T2R)3x20 MHz 2T2R3x10 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd2 3 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,and20 MHz

3x20 MHz 2T2R3x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd4 3 10 MHz, 15 MHz,and 20 MHz 3x20 MHz 8T8R



122

NOTE

l The "Antenna Configuration" column lists the maximum configurations supported by various types ofLBBPs. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz 4T4R, andtherefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and 3x5MHz 4T4R.

l As long as the maximum antenna configuration is not exceeded, different cells support different antennaconfigurations. For example, if an LBBPd2 supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, thethree cells connected to the LBBPc can use the following antenna configurations: 2T2R, 2T2R, and1T1R.

l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long asthe total bandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, ifan LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells connected to the LBBPccan use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.

l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RRUs:RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd, RRU3229,RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI convergence of theLBBP must comply with the following principles:

l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between twoLBBPc boards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.

l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multipleLBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 canconnect to RF units.

l For the LBBPc and LBBPd in LTE TDD scenarios, the maximum throughput indicates board hardwarecapabilities. The maximum uplink and downlink throughput in actual networking is related to thesubframe configuration type.

Panel

The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-27 LBBPc panel

Figure 3-28 LBBPd panel

NOTE

The LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and LBBPd4 have silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, andLBBPd4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.



123

Functions

The LBBP performs the following functions:

l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.

l Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.

Indicators

On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-57.

Table 3-57 Indicators on the LBBP panel




On for 1s and off for 1s The board is functioningproperly.


l The board is being loaded orconfigured.




On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated, and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.



l The board is not activated.l The board does not provide

any services.

On for 1s and off for 1s The power supply for the boardis insufficient.NOTE

Of all types of LBBP boards, onlythe LBBPd has this status.



124

As listed in Table 3-58, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factorPluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.

Table 3-58 SFP link status indicators





cable is broken.


The RF moduleconnected to the CPRIlink has a hardwarefault.


The CPRI link is outof lock because of thefollowing reasons:l There is no mutual


l The data rates ofthe CPRI ports donot match eachother.



The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-59 describes the indicator.



125

Table 3-59 QSFP link status indicator


HEI Red or green Steady green The inter-BBUtransmission link isfunctional.



cable is broken.


The interconnectionlink is out of lockbecause of thefollowing reasons:l There is no

mutual lockbetween twointerconnectedBBUs.

l The data rates ofthe QSFP ports donot match eachother.


PortsTable 3-60 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.

Table 3-60 LBBP ports



6 Connected to the RFmodules fortransmitting servicedata, clock signals,and synchronizationinformation.



126

Table 3-61 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel.

Table 3-61 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel


HEI QSFP connector 1 Reserved

3.1.11 FANThe FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of thefan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.

PanelThe FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-29 and Figure 3-30.

Figure 3-29 FAN



127

Figure 3-30 FANc

NOTE

There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.

Functions

The FAN unit performs the following functions:

l Controls the fan speed.

l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main controlprocessing unit.

l Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.

l Dissipates heat.

l The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.

Indicator

There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating statusof the fans. Table 3-62 describes the indicator.

Table 3-62 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit


STATE Red or green Blinking green (onfor 0.125s and off for0.125s)

The module is notregistered, and noalarm is reported.


The module isworking.


The module isreporting alarms.



128


Steady off There is no powersupply.

3.1.12 UPEUThe universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 VDC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.

PanelThe UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power andenvironment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unittype d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DCpower, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-31, Figure3-32, Figure 3-33, and Figure 3-34 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, andUPEUd, respectively.

Figure 3-31 UPEUa panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector



129

Figure 3-32 UPEUb panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 7W2 connector

Figure 3-33 UPEUc panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector

Figure 3-34 UPEUd panel

(1) BBU power switch (2) 3V3 connector

NOTE

The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.



130

Functions

The UPEU performs the following functions:

l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operatingvoltage of the boards.

l Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with eachreceiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or OpenCollector (OC) signals.

Table 3-63 describes the specifications.

Table 3-63 Specifications

Board Output Power Backup Mode

UPEUa The output power of aUPEUa is 300 W.

1+1 backup

UPEUc The output power of aUPEUc is 360 W, and theoutput power of two UPEUcboards is 650 W.

1+1 backup

UPEUd The output power of aUPEUd is 650 W.

1+1 backup

NOTE

After the UPEUa is replaced by the UPEUc, the UPEU power consumption data monitored by the M2000will change. The power consumption data does not only depend on the output power but also on the datacollection method. The UPEUc and UPEUa use different methods for collecting power consumption data.Therefore, the decrease in the power consumption shown in the M2000 after the UPEUa is replaced by theUPEUc does not necessarily reflect the actual decrease of power consumption.

Indicator

The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-64describes the indicator.

Table 3-64 Indicator on the UPEU panel


RUN Green Steady on The board isfunctional.




131

Port

The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Booleansignal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-35 shows the slots in the BBU.

Figure 3-35 Slots in the BBU

Table 3-65 describes the ports on the UPEU panel.

Table 3-65 Description on the ports

Slot Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity Description

Slot 19 +24 V or-48 V

3V3 or7W2connector

1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

EXT-ALM0

RJ45connector

1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1

RJ45connector


MON0 RJ45connector

1 Port for RS485 input 0

MON1 RJ45connector


Slot 18 +24 V or-48 V

3V3 or7W2connector

1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power

EXT-ALM0

RJ45connector


EXT-ALM1

RJ45connector


MON0 RJ45connector


MON1 RJ45connector




132

3.1.13 UEIUThe universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signalsand alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.

Panel

Figure 3-36 shows the panel of the UEIU.

Figure 3-36 Panel of the UEIU

Functions

The UEIU performs the following functions:

l Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.

l Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signalscan only be dry contact or OC signals.

l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main controlboard.

Port

The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting onepath of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Booleansignals.

Table 3-66 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.

Table 3-66 Ports on the panel of the UEIU

Slot Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

Slot 18 EXT-ALM0

RJ45connector


EXT-ALM1

RJ45connector




133

Slot Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity

Description

MON0 RJ45connector


MON1 RJ45connector


3.1.14 UTRPThe universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in theBBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.

SpecificationsTable 3-67 describes the specifications of the UTRP.

Table 3-67 Specifications of the UTRP

Board Sub-board/BoardType

Supported Mode

TransmissionMode

Numberof ports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

UTRP2 UEOC UMTS Transmission overFE/GEopticalports

2 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

Full-duplex

UTRP3 UAEC UMTS ATM overE1/T1

2 Eightchannels

Full-duplex

UTRP4 UIEC UMTS IP over E1/T1

2 Eightchannels

Full-duplex

UTRPb4 Without asub-board

GSM TDM overE1/T1

2 Eightchannels

Full-duplex

UTRP6 UUAS UMTS STM-1/OC-3

1 Onechannel

Full-duplex

UTRP9 UQEC UMTS Transmission overFE/GEelectricalports


Full-duplex



134

Board Sub-board/BoardType

Supported Mode

TransmissionMode

Numberof ports

PortCapacity

Full/Half-Duplex

UTRPc Without asub-board

GSMUMTSLTE

Transmission overFE/GEelectricalports


Full-duplex

Transmission overFE/GEopticalports


Full-duplex

PanelFigure 3-37 shows the panel of the UTRP2.

Figure 3-37 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)

Figure 3-38 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4.

Figure 3-38 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)

Figure 3-39 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode.

Figure 3-39 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)



135

Figure 3-40 shows the panel of the UTRP6.

Figure 3-40 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Figure 3-41 shows the panel of the UTRP9.

Figure 3-41 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)

Figure 3-42 shows the panel of the UTRPc.

Figure 3-42 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

FunctionsThe UTRP performs the following functions:

l Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM,TDM, and IP transmission.

l Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.l Supports cold backup.

RestrictionThe GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.

IndicatorsTable 3-68 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.



136

Table 3-68 Indicators on the UTRP panel





The board is runningproperly.












The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicatoron other boards, as listed in Table 3-69.



137

Table 3-69 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode


ACT Green Steady on l Before theconfigurationtakes effect, noneor both of the twoE1 ports in GSMmode arefunctional.

l Theconfiguration hastaken effect.


Before theconfiguration takeseffect, only one E1port in GSM mode isfunctional.

Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicatingthe status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-70.

Table 3-70 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc


LINK Green Steady on The link is connectedproperly.

Steady off The link is notconnected properly.

ACT Orange Blinking Data is beingtransmitted orreceived on the link.

Steady off No data is beingtransmitted orreceived on the link.

There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table3-71.



138

Table 3-71 Status of indicators on the UTRPc


R0 Red or green Steady off The board is notworking in GSMmode.

Steady green The board is workingin GSM mode.

Steady red Reserved

R1 Red or green Steady off The board is notworking in UMTSmode.

Steady green The board is workingin UMTS mode.

Steady red Reserved

R2 Red or green Steady off The board is notworking in LTEmode.

Steady green The board is workingin LTE mode.

Steady red Reserved

NOTE

If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.

PortsTable 3-72 describes the ports on the UTRP2.

Table 3-72 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)

Silkscreen Port Type Quantity Connector

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP femaleconnector

The UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-73.



139

Table 3-73 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)


E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 femaleconnector

Table 3-74 lists the ports on the UTRP6.

Table 3-74 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)


STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 1 SFP femaleconnector

Table 3-75 lists the ports on the UTRP9.

Table 3-75 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)


FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector

Table 3-76 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc.

Table 3-76 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)


FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP femaleconnector

FE/GE2 to FE/GE5 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ45 connector

DIP Switch

There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.

There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are used toset whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the resistance ofthe E1 cable. Figure 3-43 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-44shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4.



140

Figure 3-43 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4

Figure 3-44 DIP switches on the UTRPb4

Table 3-77, Table 3-78, and Table 3-79 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.

Table 3-77 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4



Others Unavailable



141


DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4



Others Unavailable

CAUTIONSW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.


DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1

ON ON OFF OFF The E1resistance isset to 120ohm.

ON ON ON ON The E1resistance isset to 75 ohm.

Others Unavailable

3.1.15 USCUThis section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).

SpecificationsThe USCU falls into five types, as shown in Table 3-80.



142

Table 3-80 Specifications of the USCU

Board Supported Mode Supported Satellite Card

USCUb11 LTE N/A

USCUb14 GSMUMTSLTE

UBLOX single-satellite card

USCUb22 GSMUMTSLTE

Naviors dual-satellite card

PanelThere are five types of USCU: USCUb11, USCUb12, USCUb14, USCUb22, and USCUb21,as shown in Figure 3-45 and Figure 3-46. The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have thesame exterior. The USCUb22 and the USCUb21 have the same exterior.

Figure 3-45 USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 panel

Figure 3-46 USCUb22 and USCUb21 panel

(1) GPS port (2) RGPS port (3) TOD port (4) M-1PPS port (5) BITS port



143

NOTE

l The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have silkscreens USCUb11 , USCUb12 and USCUb14indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

l The USCUb22 and USCUb21 have silkscreens USCUb22 and USCUb21 indicating their board typeson the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.

Functions

The USCU has the following functions:

l The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reusedequipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.

l The USCUb12 contains an RT satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.

l The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.

l The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which mustbe purchased locally and installed onsite.

l The USCUb21 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a K161 satellite card, which mustbe purchased locally and installed onsite.

Indicators

Table 3-81 and Table 3-82 describe the indicators on the USCU.

Table 3-81 Indicators on the USCU













144








Table 3-82 Indicators for the TOD ports

Color Status Description

Green (on the left) The green indicator is steadyon and the orange indicator issteady off.

The TOD port is configured asan input port.

Orange (on the right) The orange indicator is steadyon and the green indicator issteady off.

The TOD port is configured asan output port.

PortsTable 3-83 describes the ports on the USCU.

Table 3-83 Ports on the USCU


GPS SMA connector The GPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21,USCUb14 and USCUb22 receive GPS signals.The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved andcannot receive GPS signals.



145


RGPS port PCB weldedwiring terminal

The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPSsignals.The RGPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21,USCUb14 and USCUb22 are reserved and cannotreceive RGPS signals.

TOD0 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.

TOD1 port RJ45 connector This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals,and receives TOD signals from the M1000.

BITS port SMA connector This port receives BITS clock signals, supportsadaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clockreference source.

M-1PPS port SMA connector This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.

3.1.16 UBRIThe universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical orelectrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on theCPRI.

Panel

Figure 3-47 shows the panel of the UBRI.

Figure 3-47 UBRI panel

Functions

The UBRI performs the following functions:

l Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.

l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.

Indicators

Table 3-84 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.



146

Table 3-84 Indicators on the UBRI panel




On for 1s and off for 1s The board is running properly.


Software is being loaded to theboard.

ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated on theboard.


On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.





The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators areabove the SFP ports. Table 3-85 describes the indicators.

Table 3-85 CPRI port status indicators





147


Steady red An optical modulefails to receive signalsbecause of thefollowing reasons:l The optical


cable is broken.


The CPRI link is outof lock because of thefollowing reasons:l There is no mutual


l The data rates ofthe CPRI ports donot match eachother.



PortsTable 3-86 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.

Table 3-86 Ports on the UBRI panel



6 Connecting the BBUand the RF module

The following table lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI.



148

Table 3-87 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI

Board CPRI PortQuantity

CPRI Port DataRate (Gbit/s)

Topology Type

UBRI 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, and ringtopologies

3.1.17 UCIUThe universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwardscontrol and synchronization information from one BBU to another.

PanelFigure 3-48 shows the UCIU panel.

Figure 3-48 UCIU panel

FunctionsThe UCIU performs the following functions:

l Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it isshared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.

l Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBUto another.

l Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.l Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.

IndicatorsA UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports forinterconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-88 describes theindicators on the UCIU panel.



149

Table 3-88 Indicators on the UCIU panel





The board is running properly.


l The board is being loaded orconfigured.



Steady off There is no fault.


An alarm is generated and youneed to locate the fault beforedeciding whether to replace theboard.





M0 to M4and S0

Red or green Steady green The inter-BBU transmissionlink is normal.

Steady red The optical module fails totransmit or receive signals, orthe fiber optic cable is faulty.



150



Cables are connected in anincorrect manner. For example:l In the UCIU+UMPT

scenario, the S0 port on theUCIU is connected to the CIport on the UMPT.Indicators for the S0 and CIports are blinking.

l The ports are connected inring topology. Indicators forall incorrectly connectedports are blinking.

Steady off The optical module cannot bedetected.

Ports

Table 3-89 describes UCIU ports.

Table 3-89 UCIU ports


M0 to M4 SFP femaleconnector

Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to thesecondary inter-BBU ports.

S0 SFP femaleconnector

Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to theprimary inter-BBU port.

GCK DB15 connector Provides reference clocks when the base stationand a 3012 series base station are combined.

3.2 RRUThe Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antennasystem.

The RRU implements the following functions:

l Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for thecommunication between the BBU and the RRU.

l The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the receivedsignals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.



151

l Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antennapath. It also filters the RX and TX signals.

For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.

3.3 SLPUThe signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.

3.3.1 SLPUThe SLPU, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high.

Figure 3-49 shows the SLPU.

Figure 3-49 SLPU

3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPUThis section describes the slot assignment rules for the SPLU boards.

Slots of the SLPU

Figure 3-50 shows the slots of the SLPU.

Figure 3-50 SLPU slots

Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU

When the SLPU is used as a trunk signal protection unit, a mandatory component, it can beintegrated with UELP or UFLP and is installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet.Table 3-90 lists the slot assignment rules of the SLPU.



152

Table 3-90 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU

Board Optional orMandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot Remarks

UELP Optional 4 Slot 0 to slot 3 The UELP isinstalled, indescendingorder of priority,in slot 2, 0, 1, or3.

UFLP Optional 1 Slot 3 If both theUELP andUFLP areconfigured, theUFLP isinstalled in a slotwith a higherpriority than theUELP.

When there are not more than 16 dry contacts in the SLPU, the SLPU is used as a monitoringsignal protection unit, which is an optional component. In this case, the SLPU is integrated withtwo USLP2s and installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space at the bottom of the BBU.Table 3-91 lists the slot assignment rules for the SLPU.

Table 3-91 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU

Board Optional orMandatory

Quantity Slot Remarks

USLP2 Optional 2 Slot 2 and slot 3 -

3.3.3 UELPEach universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four pathsof E1/T1 signals.

PanelFigure 3-51 shows the panel of the UELP.

Figure 3-51 UELP panel



153

PortsTable 3-92 lists the ports on the UELP.

Table 3-92 Ports on the UELP


INSIDE DB25 female connector Connecting to a transmissionboard of the base station

OUTSIDE DB26 female connector Connecting to an externaltransmission device

DIP SwitchThe UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 3-52 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.

Figure 3-52 DIP switch on the UELP

Table 3-93 describes the DIP switch on the UELP.



154

Table 3-93 DIP switch on the UELP

DIPSwitch


1 2 3 4

S1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not grounded

Other status Grounded

NOTE

The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cableof 100 ohms cannot be grounded.

3.3.4 UFLPEach universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FEsignals. Each universal FE lightning protection unit type B (UFLPB) provides protection for twochannels of FE/GE signals.

NOTE

The UFLPB applies only to the LTE mode.

Panel

Figure 3-53 shows the UELP panel.

Figure 3-53 UELP panel

Figure 3-54 shows the UFLPB panel.

Figure 3-54 UFLPB panel

Port

Table 3-94 describes UFLP ports.



155

Table 3-94 UFLP ports

Port Location Silkscreen Connector Description

INSIDE side FE0 and FE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to atransmission board of thebase station

OUTSIDE side FE0 and FE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to an externaltransmission device

Table 3-95 describes UFLPB ports.

Table 3-95 UFLPB ports

Port Location Silkscreen on thePanel

Connector Description

INSIDE side FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to atransmission boardof the base station

OUTSIDE side FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 RJ45 connector Connecting to anexternaltransmission device

3.3.5 USLP2The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protectionunit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.

Panel

Figure 3-55 shows the panel of a USLP2.

Figure 3-55 Panel of a USLP2

Port

There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-96 lists the ports on thepanel of the USLP2.



156

Table 3-96 Ports on the panel of the USLP2

Silkscreen onthe Panel

Port Type Quantity Description

IN0, IN1, IN2,and IN3

4-pin 4 Input ports, whichconnect to customizedalarm devices

OUT0 and OUT1 RJ45 connector 2 Output ports, whichconnect to an EXT-ALM port of the UPEUor UEIU in the cabinet

Figure 3-56 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports onthe USLP2.

Figure 3-56 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 48 6 4 27 5 3 1

8 6 4 27 5 3 1

IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3OUT0 OUT1

Table 3-97 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on theUSLP2.

Table 3-97 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2

Input Output

Silkscreen on thePanel

Pin Silkscreen on thePanel

Pin

INO IN0.1 OUT1 OUT1.1

IN0.2 OUT1.2

IN0.3 OUT1.4

IN0.4 OUT1.5

IN1 IN1.1 OUT1.3

IN1.2 OUT1.6



157

Input Output

Silkscreen on thePanel

Pin Silkscreen on thePanel

Pin

IN1.3 OUT1.7

IN1.4 OUT1.8

IN2 IN2.1 OUT0 OUT0.1

IN2.2 OUT0.2

IN2.3 OUT0.4

IN2.4 OUT0.5

IN3 IN3.1 OUT0.3

IN3.2 OUT0.6

IN3.3 OUT0.7

IN3.4 OUT0.8

For details about the application of the USLP2, see 3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for theSLPU.

3.4 WGRUThe WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning informationand clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clocksignals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPSpositioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each basestation can be configured with a WGRU.

ExteriorFigure 3-57 shows a WGRU. Figure 3-58 shows a WGRU installed in a case.

Figure 3-57 WGRU



158

Figure 3-58 WGRU installed in a case

PanelAs shown in Figure 3-59, there are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of theWGRU.

As shown in Figure 3-60, there is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rearpanel of the WGRU.

Figure 3-59 Front panel of a WGRU



159

Figure 3-60 Rear panel of a WGRU

Indicators on the Front PanelOn the front panel of the WGRU, there are three indicators: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table3-98 describes the three indicators.

Table 3-98 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU


RUN Green On for 1s and off for1s

The WGRU isrunning properly.

Steady on There is powersupply, but theWGRU suite isfaulty.

Steady off There is no powersupply, or theWGRU suite isfaulty.

ALM Red Steady off No alarm isgenerated.

Steady on An alarm is reported,indicating a faultduring the operation.

ACT Green Steady on The WGRU hasinterpreted thepositioninginformation.

Steady off The WGRU fails tointerpret thepositioninginformation.



160

Ports on the Front Panel

On the front panel of the WGRU, there are six ports: PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, andCLK2. Table 3-99 describes the six ports.

Table 3-99 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU

Silkscreen Port Type Description

PPS1 RJ45 connector Outputs PPS signals.

PPS2 RJ45 connector Reserved

COM1 RJ45 connector Forwards GPS informationand BBU interaction,management, andmaintenance information.

COM2 RJ45 connector Reserved

CLK1 RJ45 connector Reserved

CLK2 RJ45 connector Reserved

Ports on the Rear Panel

On the rear panel of the WGRU, there are two ports: POWER and ANT.

Table 3-100 describes the two ports.

Table 3-100 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU


POWER Two-pole male connector Feeds external power.

ANT N-type female connector Connects to the GPS antennasystem.

3.5 EMUAThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinetand reports related alarms.

The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring theenvironment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the followingitems:

l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke

l Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor



161

l Power distribution

For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.



162

4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios ofvarious DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900cabinets.

For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the TP48600Acabinet, see TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual. For details about the exterior, functions,specifications, and components of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T cabinets, see IBBS700D &IBBS700T User Guide.

4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900To adapt to the complicated and various environments indoors and outdoors, Huawei providesmultiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are theAPM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB/OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, andIFS06. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMBis short for outdoor mini box, IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floorinstallation support.

4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900This section describes the module or board configurations of cabinets used by the DBS3900.

4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900This section describes the engineering specifications of various cabinets used by the DBS3900.

4.4 Components in DBS3900 CabinetsThis section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.

4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal EquipmentThe equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineeringspecifications.

DBS3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks


163

4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900To adapt to the complicated and various environments indoors and outdoors, Huawei providesmultiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are theAPM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB/OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, andIFS06. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMBis short for outdoor mini box, IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floorinstallation support.

APM/TMC Series CabinetsFigure 4-1 shows the APM/TMC series cabinets: APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). APM30H is short for advanced power module witha heat exchanger, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat exchanger.

Figure 4-1 Exteriors of the APM/TMC series cabinets

Battery CabinetsThe battery cabinets include the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T(Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D),IBBS700D, and IBBS700T. Figure 4-2 shows the IBBS700D and IBBS700T, and Figure 4-3shows other types of battery cabinets.



164

Figure 4-2 IBBS700D and IBBS700T

Figure 4-3 Other types of battery cabinets



165

OMB/OMB (Ver.C)

Figure 4-4 shows the OMB and OMB (Ver.C).

Figure 4-4 Exteriors of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)

IMB03/IFS06

Figure 4-5 shows the IMB03 and IFS06.

Figure 4-5 Exteriors of the IMB03 and IFS06

4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900This section describes the module or board configurations of cabinets used by the DBS3900.



166

FunctionsNOTE

For the functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) ProductDescription, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.

The main functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900 are as follows:

l The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are usedfor Huawei wireless products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC powerdistribution functions for distributed or separate base stations used outdoors and alsoprovide space for customer equipment.

– The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipationand monitoring modes. The APM30 uses breathable film and fans to dissipate heat, andthe APM30H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and outer air circulationfans to dissipate heat. The APM30 is configured with an APM power monitoringinterface unit (APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environmentand power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with a heat exchangeunit type A (HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.

– The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in themonitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA in thefan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a centralmonitoring unit type A (CMUA) to perform centralized monitoring. The APM30H(Ver.A) uses a power distribution unit (PDU) to distribute power, and the APM30H(Ver.B) uses an embedded power system (EPS) to distribute power. In addition, theAPM30H (Ver.B) uses an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type.

– The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in themonitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) uses a centralmonitoring unit type E (CMUE) in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and reportalarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA to perform centralized monitoring.The APM30H (Ver.C) uses an embedded power subrack unit (EPU), EPU03A-03 orEPU03A-05, to distribute power, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses an EPS to distributepower.

– The differences between the APM30H(Ver.D) and APM30H (Ver.C) reside in themonitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in thefan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.C) uses a CMUEin the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms. The EPU03A-03 orEPU03A-05 installed in the APM30H(Ver.D) has higher power distribution capacitythan the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).

l The transmission cabinets (TMCs) are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. TheTMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed or separatebase stations and also provide space for customer equipment.

– The differences between the TMC and TMC11H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipationand monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and TMC11H(Ver.B) reside in the monitoring mode. The TMC uses breathable film and fans todissipate heat, and the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner andouter air circulation fans to dissipate heat. The TMC uses an APMI and an AFMU tomonitor other components, the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA to monitor othercomponents, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA and a HERT power monitoring



167

interface unit (HPMI) to monitor other components. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver.B)uses an ELU to report the cabinet type.

– The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.B) reside in themonitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE in thefan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUAto perform centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B todistribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a DCDU-03B to distribute power.

– The differences between the TMC11H(Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.C) reside in themonitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in thefan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUEin the fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses aDCDU-12B to distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B todistribute power.

l Battery cabinets are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The cabinets providespace for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for distributed orseparate base stations. The IBBS200D and IBBS200T differ in the heat dissipation mode.

l The outdoor mini box (OMB) and OMB (Ver.C) apply to outdoor distributed base stations.Their differences reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The OMB usesan AC/DC power system or DCDU-03B to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, and theOMB (Ver.C) uses an ETP48100-A1 or PDU10D-01 to supply power to the BBU andRRUs. The OMB uses an HEUA to monitor fans and report alarms, and the OMB (Ver.C)uses an HEUB to monitor fans and report alarms.

l The indoor mini box 03 (IMB03) applies to indoor distributed base stations. It uses a BBUand other customer equipment, and supports either AC or DC power input. The indoor floorinstallation support 06 (IFS06) applies to indoor distributed base stations, and supportscentralized installation of RRUs.

l The TP48600A is an outdoor power cabinet. It provides AC and DC power distributionfunctions for distributed base stations outdoors and also provides space for customerequipment. The TP48600A uses storage batteries which provide backup power fordistributed base stations.

APMThe APM series cabinets are classified into APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B),APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H(Ver.D). Figure 4-6 shows the configurations of the APMseries cabinets.



168

Figure 4-6 Configurations of the APM series cabinets

Different types of the APM series cabinets use different heat dissipation, power distribution, andmonitoring modes, which are supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantityConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

APM30 1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theAPMI,AFMU, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.

2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower.



169

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spacebelow thePDU,processingbasebandsignals.

4 PSU (AC/DC)

Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto -48 VDC. It isconfiguredonly in anAC cabinet.

5 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isconfiguredonly in anAC cabinet.

APM30H(Ver.A)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theHEUA,HPMI, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.

2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower.



170

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spacebelow thePDU,processingbasebandsignals.

4 PSU (AC/DC)



APM30H(Ver.B)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theHPMI,CMUA, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.



171

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protecttrunksignals, asignallightningprotectionunit (SLPU)configuredwith auniversal E1/T1 lightingprotectionunit (UELP)or/and auniversal FE/GE lightningprotection(UFLP) ismandatorilyinstalled inthe 1 U spaceat the top ofthe cabinet.To protectmonitoringsignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s canbe optionallyinstalled inthe 1 U spacebelow theBBU.



172

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 EPS Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower. It isconfiguredonly in theAPM30H(Ver.B).

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spacebelow theEPS,processingbasebandsignals.

5 PSU (AC/DC)



APM30H(Ver.C)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theHPMI,CMUE, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.



173

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protecttrunksignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith a UELPor/and aUFLP ismandatorilyinstalled inthe 1 U spaceat the top ofthe cabinet.To protectmonitoringsignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s canbe optionallyinstalled inthe 1 U spacebelow theBBU.

3 EPU(EPU03A-03 orEPU03A-05)

Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower. It isconfiguredonly in theAPM30H(Ver.C).

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spacebelow theEPU,processingbasebandsignals.



174

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

5 PSU (AC/DC)



APM30H(Ver.D)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 A fanassembly isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet. It isconfiguredwith fans andthe CMUEA.



175

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description


3 EPU(EPU05A-03 orEPU05A-05)

Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower.

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spacebelow theEPU,processingbasebandsignals.



176

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

5 PSU (AC/DC)



TMC

The TMC series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H(Ver.D). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heatexchanger. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following types based ondifferent application scenarios:l Figure 4-7 shows TMC cabinets which provide space for the transmission equipment.

Figure 4-7 TMC series cabinets (1)



177

l Figure 4-8 shows the TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supplyscenario.

Figure 4-8 TMC series cabinets (2)

Different types of TMC cabinets use different heat dissipation and monitoring modes, which aresupported by various components, as listed in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

TMC 1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theAPMI,AFMU, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.



178

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The TMCisconfigured with aDCDU-03C whenthe TMCprovidesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.

l The TMCwith abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-03B whenthe -48 VDCpower issupplied.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spacebelow theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.



179

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

TMC11H(Ver.A)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theHEUA,HPMI, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.

2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver.A)isconfigured with aDCDU-03C whenthe TMCprovidesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.

l TheTMC11H(Ver.A)with abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-03B whenthe -48 VDCpower issupplied.



180

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description


TMC11H(Ver.B)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theHPMI,CMUA, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.



181

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description




182

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver.B) isconfigured with aDCDU-03C whentheTMC11H(Ver.B)providesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.

l TheTMC11H(Ver.B)with abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-03B whenthe -48 VDCpower issupplied.




183

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

TMC11H(Ver.C)

1 Fanassembly

Mandatory 1 The fanassemblyconfiguredwith theHPMI,CMUE, andfans isinstalled atthe top of thecabinet.




184

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 DCDU-11 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver.C) isconfigured with aDCDU-11C whentheTMC11H(Ver.C)providesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.

l TheTMC11H(Ver.C)with abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-11B whenthe -48 VDCpower issupplied.




185

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

TMC11H(Ver.D)serving as atransmissioncabinet

1 Fanassembly


2 SLPU Optional 1 When theTMC11H(Ver.D)houses BBU1 (leaf BBU),an SLPUconfiguredwith a UELPor/and aUFLP isinstalled inthe top 1 Uspace of theTMC11H(Ver.D).

3 DCDU-12C Mandatory 1 TheTMC11H(Ver.D) isconfiguredwith aDCDU-12Cwhen theTMCprovidesspace onlyfor thetransmissionequipment oris configuredwith BBU 1(leaf BBU).



186

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

4 BBU Optional 1 In triple-modescenarios,BBU 1 (leafBBU) can beinstalled inthe TMC11H(Ver.D).

TMC11H(Ver.D)serving as apowercabinet

1 Fanassembly





187

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 DCDU-12B Mandatory 1 When theTMC11H(Ver.D)serves as apowercabinet, it isconfiguredwith aDCDU-12B.


BBC/IBBSThe battery cabinets are classified into BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T(Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-9 shows the configurations ofthe BBC or IBBS series cabinets.

Figure 4-9 Components in the BBC/IBBS series cabinets

The differences between the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T reside in the monitoring and heatdissipation module configurations, as listed in Table 4-3.



188

Table 4-3 Functions of the components in the IBBS series cabinets

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

BBC 1 Powersupply boxfor theheating film

Mandatory 1 The powersupply boxfeeds powerinto theheating film.

2 Ground barfor thecabinet

Mandatory 1 The groundbar is usedfor thegrounding ofthecomponentsin thecabinet.

3 Storagebattery

Mandatory 8 The storagebatteriesprovidelong-durationbackuppower forbase stations.

4 BBC Mandatory 4 The BBCprovidespower tostoragebatteries.



189

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

IBBS200T(Ver.A)

1 TEC Mandatory 1 Thethermoelectric coolingunit (TEC) isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.

2 Transferterminal forthe signalcable

Mandatory 1 The transferterminalblock for thesignal cableis installedon the innerside of thefront door ofthe cabinet. Itconsists offourinterconnection terminals.



190

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 Transferterminal forthe inputpower cablefor the TEC

Mandatory 1 The transferterminal forthe inputpower cablefor the TECis installedon the innerside of thefront door ofthe cabinet.

4 Storagebattery


5 Junction boxfor the powercable

Mandatory 1 The junctionbox for thepower cableis installedon the innerright side oftheIBBS200T.It consists ofthe copperbar, circuitbreaker forthe batteries,and circuitbreaker forthe TEC.

IBBS200D(Ver.B)/(Ver.C)

1 Fan Mandatory 2 The fan isinstalled onthe frontdoor of thecabinet,dissipatingheat from thecabinet.



191

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

2 CMUA/CMUE

Mandatory 1 A CMUA orCMUEprovides thefollowingfunctions:temperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.

3 Powerdistributionbox

Optional 1 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled onthe upperinner rightside of thecabinet. Ittransfers anddistributespower to theTEC or FANunit andstoragebatteries.

4 Storagebattery




192

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

IBBS200T(Ver.B)/(Ver.C)

1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.

2 CMUA/CMUE

Mandatory 1 A CMUA orCMUEprovides thefollowingfunctions:temperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.



193

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description


Mandatory 8 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled onthe upperinner rightside of thecabinet. Ittransfers anddistributespower to theTEC or FANunit andstoragebatteries.

4 Storagebattery


IBBS200D(Ver.D)

1 Fan Mandatory 1 The fan isinstalled onthe frontdoor of thecabinet,dissipatingheat from thecabinet.



194

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

2 CMUEA Mandatory 1 TheCMUEAprovidesfunctions oftemperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.



4 Storagebattery




195

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

IBBS200T(Ver.D)

1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.

2 CMUEA Mandatory 1 TheCMUEAprovidesfunctions oftemperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.



196

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description



4 Storagebattery


The following figure shows the interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.



197

Figure 4-10 Interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T

The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.

Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

IBBS700D 1 Fanmountingframe

Mandatory 1 The fanmountingframe isinstalled inthe lowermiddle in thefront door ofthe cabinet,andconfiguredwith a fan.



198

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

2 CMUEA Mandatory 1 The centralmonitoringunit type EA(CMUEA)controlstemperature,detectsBooleanalarm, andidentifies theELU.

3 and 4 ELU Mandatory 1 Theelectroniclabel unit(ELU)reports thecabinet typeautomatically to facilitatetroubleshooting.When a CCUisconfigured,the ELU isinstalled inposition 4.When noCCU isconfigured,the ELU isinstalled inposition 3.



199

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

5 CCU - 1 The cabinetcontrol unit(CCU)monitors theoperatingenvironmentof the cabinetand managesdevices.When anAPM30H(Ver.D) isconfigured,no CCU isinstalled.When aTP48600A-H17B1 isconfigured,the CCUmust beinstalled.

6 AC Junctionbox

Mandatory 1 The ACjunction boxis installedon the innerleft wall ofthe cabinet. Itprovidespower for theheater.



200

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

7 HAU01A-01 Optional 1 The HeaterAssemblyUnit 01A-01(HAU01A-01) ensures asuitablestorage andoperatingtemperaturefor thestoragebatteries.

8 Storagebattery


9 Door statussensor

Mandatory 1 The doorstatus sensormonitors thestatus (openor closed) ofthe frontdoor of thecabinet.


Mandatory 1 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled inthe middle ofthe cabinet. Ittransfers anddistributespower to theTEC or FANunit andstoragebatteries.



201

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

IBBS700T 1 Inner aircirculationfan

Mandatory 1 The inner aircirculationfan isinstalled atthe top of thefront door ofthe cabinet. Itdissipatesheat from thestoragebatteries.

2 TEC Mandatory 1 To dissipateheat from thestoragebatteries, theTEC ensuresthe normaloperation ofthe cabinet inhigh-temperatureareas.

3 Outer aircirculationfan

Mandatory 1 The outer aircirculationfan isinstalled atthe bottom ofthe frontdoor of thecabinet. Itdissipatesheat from theTEC.



202

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

4 CMUF Mandatory 1 The centralmonitoringunit type F(CMUF)controlstemperature,detectsBooleanalarm, andidentifies theELU.

5 and 6 ELU Mandatory 1 Theelectroniclabel unit(ELU)reports thecabinet typeautomatically to facilitatetroubleshooting.When a CCUisconfigured,the ELU isinstalled inposition 6.When noCCU isconfigured,the ELU isinstalled inposition 5.



203

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

7 CCU - 1 The cabinetcontrol unit(CCU)monitors theoperatingenvironmentof the cabinetand managesdevices.When anAPM30H(Ver.D) isconfigured,no CCU isinstalled.When aTP48600A-H17B1 isconfigured,the CCUmust beinstalled.

8 AC Junctionbox

Mandatory 1 The ACjunction boxis installedon the innerleft wall ofthe cabinet. Itprovidespower for theheater.



204

CabinetType

No. Component

Optional/Mandatory


Remarks

9 HAU01A-01 Optional 1 The HeaterAssemblyUnit 01A-01(HAU01A-01) ensures asuitablestorage andoperatingtemperaturefor thestoragebatteries.

10 Storagebattery


11 Door statussensor

Mandatory 1 The doorstatus sensormonitors thestatus (openor closed) ofthe frontdoor of thecabinet.


Mandatory 1 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled inthe middle ofthe cabinet. Ittransfers anddistributespower to theTEC or FANunit andstoragebatteries.



205

OMB/OMB (Ver.C)

Figure 4-11 shows the configurations of OMBs, including the AC and DC OMBs.

Figure 4-11 Configuration of the OMBs

The AC OMB and DC OMB have different power equipment and use different surge protectionmethods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-5.

Table 4-5 Components in the OMBs

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantityConfigured ina SingleCabinet

Description

1 HEUA Mandatory 1 The HEUAprovides powerfor the fanassembly,monitors thestatus of the fanassembly,collects thecabinetenvironmentmonitoringinformation andpower surgeprotection alarminformation,and reports thecollectedinformation tothe BBU.



206

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

2 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled in the 2U space on theleft side of thecabinet,processingbasebandsignals.

3 AC surgeprotection box

Mandatory 1 The AC surgeprotection boxprovides surgeprotection forthe AC inputpower.

4 AC/DC powerequipment

Mandatory 1 The AC/DCpowerequipmentconverts 220 VAC power to -48V DC power.

5 DCDU-03B Mandatory 1 TheDCDU-03Bprovides DCpower to allcomponents inthe cabinet.

Figure 4-12 shows the configuration of OMBs (Ver.C), including the AC OMB (Ver.C) andDC OMB (Ver.C).



207

Figure 4-12 Configuration of the OMBs (Ver.C)

The AC OMB (Ver.C) and DC OMB (Ver.C) have different power equipment and use differentsurge protection methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6 Components in the OMBs (Ver.C)

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

1 ELU Mandatory 1 The ELUautomaticallyreports thecabinet type.

2 PMU 11A Mandatory 1 The PMU 11Aprovides powersystem, powermonitoringfunction, andalarm reportingfunction.



208

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

3 HEUB Mandatory 1 The HEUBprovides powerfor the fanassembly,monitors thestatus of the fanassembly,collects thecabinetenvironmentmonitoringinformation andpower surgeprotection alarminformation,and reports thecollectedinformation tothe BBU.

4 PSU(R4850G2)

Mandatory 2 The PSUconverts 110 V/220 V ACpower into -48V DC.

5 BBU3900 Mandatory 1 The BBU3900processesbasebandsignals andenablesinteractionbetween thebase station andbase stationcontroller.



209

No. Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory


Description

6 Fan assembly Mandatory 2 The fanassemblydissipates heatfrom thecabinet. Twofan assembliesare separatelyinstalled at theleft bottom andthe left top of theOMB.

7 PDU10D-01 Mandatory 1 ThePDU10D-01 is aDC powerdistribution unitsupplying -48 VDC power to allcomponents inthe cabinet.

8 SPD Mandatory 1 The SPDprovides surgeprotection forthe AC inputpower.

9 ETP48100-A1 Mandatory 1 The embeddedtelecommunica-tion power A1(ETP48100-A1)convertsexternal ACinput power intoDC power.

IMB03The IMB03 is classified into the AC and DC IMB03, of which the configurations are shown inFigure 4-13.



210

Figure 4-13 IMB03 cabinets

The AC IMB03 and DC IMB03 have different power equipment. Table 4-7 lists the componentsconfigured in each IMB03 cabinet.

Table 4-7 Components in the IMB03 cabinet

CabinetType

No. Module/Board

Optional orMandatory

MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

AC IMB03 1 AC/DCpowerequipment

Mandatory 1 The AC/DCpowerequipmentconverts 220V AC powerto -48 V DCpower.

2 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe right 2 Uspace of thecabinet.

DC IMB03 1 DCDU-03B Mandatory 1 TheDCDU-03Bprovides DCpower to allcomponentsin thecabinet.



211

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

2 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe right 2 Uspace of thecabinet.

TP48600AThe TP48600A supports AC power input. Figure 4-14 shows the interior of the TP48600A.

Figure 4-14 Configurations of the TP48600A

Table 4-8 lists the components in the TP48600A.



212

Table 4-8 Components in the TP48600A

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

TP48600A 1 FAU02D-07 Mandatory 1 TheFAU02D-07is a fanassemblyunit used fortheequipmentcompartment. It consistsof two fansand a centralmonitoringunit type F(CMUF).The fansdissipateheat from thecabinet.TheFAU02D-07is shortenedto FAU inthisdocument.

2 CCU Mandatory 1 The cabinetcontrol unit(CCU)monitors theoperatingenvironmentof the cabinetand controlsequipment.



213

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

3 SLPU Mandatory 1 To protecttrunksignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith theUELP orUFLP ismandatory.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceat the top ofthe cabinet.

4 ETP Mandatory 1 Theembeddedtelecommunication power(ETP)systemconverts ACpower intoDC powerand suppliespower to alltheequipmentinside thecabinet. TheETP consistsof the ETPsubrack,PMU, andPSUs.



214

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

5 R4850G2 Mandatory 7 TheR4850G2converts 110V AC or 220V AC powerinto -48 VDC power.It isshortened toPSU in thisdocument.

6 PMU 10 A Mandatory 1 The powermonitoringunit 10 A(PMU 10 A)provides thefollowingfunctions:powersystem andbatterymanagement, powermonitoring,and alarmreporting.It isshortened toPMU in thisdocument.

7 DCDU-11C Mandatory 1 Directcurrentdistributionunit-11C(DCDU-11C) providesten DCoutputs forthe BBU,CCU, andCMUF in thecabinet.



215

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

8 BBU Mandatory 2 Thebasebandprocessingunit(BBU3900),whichprocessesbasebandsignals, isinstalledunder theDCDU-11C.

9 DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B

Mandatory 2 TheDCDU-11B/DCDU-03Bprovides DCpower toRRUs. Whenonly oneDCDU-11B/DCDU-03Bisconfigured,it ispreferentially configuredin the leftslot.

10 PDU05A-03 Mandatory 1 ThePDU05A-3provides ACpower for theETP.

11 Storagebattery

Optional 8 The storagebatteryprovidesbackuppower for abase station.



216

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

12 CMUF Mandatory 1 The centralmonitoringunit type F(CMUF)provides thefollowingfunctions:heatexchangercontrol, fanspeedadjustment,and ELUidentification.

13 HAU Optional 2 The heaterassemblyunit (HAU)ensures thatcomponentsin the cabinetwork withintheacceptabletemperaturerange whenthesurroundingtemperatureis low. It isoptional.

14 Fan Mandatory 3 Fansdissipateheat from acabinet.



217

CabinetType

No. Module/Board



Description

15 Space forcustomerequipment

- - The space forcustomerequipment is5 U. It isprovided forthe SLPU,EMUA, andtransmissionequipment.

16 Documentholder

Mandatory 1 Thedocumentholder isused to holddocuments.

4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used bythe DBS3900

This section describes the engineering specifications of various cabinets used by the DBS3900.

Engineering Specifications of the APM, TMC, and Battery CabinetsFor the engineering specifications of the APM30, TMC, and BBC, see EngineeringSpecifications of the APM30. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short fortransmission cabinet, and BBC is short for battery backup cabinet.

For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and IBBS200T(Ver.A), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H. APM30H is short for advanced powermodule with a heat exchanger, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heatexchanger.

For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), IBBS200T(Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.B), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H, IBBS200T,IBBS200D, and TMC11H.

For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), IBBS200T(Ver.C), and IBBS200D (Ver.C), see Specifications of the APM30H, Specifications of theTMC11H, Specifications of the IBBS200D, and Specifications of the IBBS200T, respectively.

For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), IBBS200D(Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D), see Technical Specifications of an APM30H, TechnicalSpecifications of a TMC11H, and Technical Specifications of an IBBS200D, and TechnicalSpecifications of an IBBS200T, respectively.



218

For details about the IBBS700D, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700D inEngineering Specifications of an IBBS700D.

For details about the IBBS700T, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700T in EngineeringSpecifications of an IBBS700T.

Engineering Specifications of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)

Table 4-9 lists the engineering specifications of the outdoor mini box (OMB).

Table 4-9 Engineering specifications of the OMB

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45in. x 15.35 in.)

Weight OMB subrack: ≤ 15 kg (33.08 lb)

AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg (55.13 lb)

DC OMB: ≤ 22.5 kg (49.61 lb)

Ambient temperature Without solar radiation: -40oC to +50oC(-40oF to +122oF)

Short-term operation: 50oC to 55oC (122oF to131oF)NOTE

Short-term operation indicates that the continuousoperation time does not exceed 96 hours or theaccumulated operation time within a year does notexceed 15 days.

Relative humidity 5% RH to 100% RH

Table 4-10 lists the engineering specifications of the OMB (Ver.C).

Table 4-10 Engineering specifications of the OMB (Ver.C)

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45in. x 16.93 in.)

Weight AC OMB: ≤ 30 kg (66.14 lb)

DC OMB: ≤ 21 kg (46.30 lb)

Ambient temperature -27.4 oF to 122 oFNOTE

The temperature alarm lower threshold is -33oC(-27.4oF).



219

Item Specifications

Relative humidity 5% RH to 100% RH

Engineering Specifications of the IMB03

Table 4-11 lists the engineering specifications of the IMB03. IMB is short for indoor mini box.

Table 4-11 Engineering Specifications of the IMB03

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) 560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x16.73 in. x 7.09 in.)

Weight 10 kg (22.05 lb)

Ambient temperature -4oF to 122oF

4.4 Components in DBS3900 CabinetsThis section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.

4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery CabinetThis section describes the components in the APM, TMC, and battery cabinet.

For the components in the APM30, TMC, and battery cabinet, see the APM30&BBC&TMC UserGuide.

For the components in the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and battery cabinet, see theAPM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide.

For the components in the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), and battery cabinet, see theAPM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.B) Product Description.

For the components in the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), and battery cabinet, see theAPM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product Description.

For the components in the APM30H(Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), and battery cabinets, see theAPM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.

For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the IBBS700D andIBBS700T, see IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.

4.4.2 Components in the OMBThis section describes the components in the OMB configured for the DBS3900.



220

HEUA

The Heat Exchange Unit Type A (HEUA) monitors the fans and reports the related alarms.

Structure

The HEUA is the heat exchange monitoring unit. Figure 4-15 shows the HEUA.

Figure 4-15 HEUA

Ports

Figure 4-16 shows the ports on the HEUA, and Table 4-12 describes the ports on the HEUA.

Figure 4-16 Ports on the HEUA

Table 4-12 Ports on the HEUA

SN Port Quantity Function

1 3V3 power supplyport

1 Leading DC inputpower to the HEUA



221

SN Port Quantity Function

2 and 3 4-pin sockets 2 Providing theterminals for thepower or alarmsignals of the twoouter air circulationfans

4 LEDs 2 Indicating therunning status andalarm status of thefans

5 and 6 RJ45 ports 2 two RS485 signalsl COM OUT:

connecting to thePMU or lower-level HEUA

l COM IN:connecting to theBBU or upper-level HEUA

7 Short-circuiting cap 1 Differentiating theAPM30H orTMC11H from othercabinets

8 and 9 4-pin sockets 2 Providing theterminals for thepower or alarmsignals of the twoinner air circulationfans

AC/DC Power EquipmentThe AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distributionbox with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC powerto the components in the cabinet.

ExteriorFigure 4-17 shows the AC/DC power equipment.



222

Figure 4-17 AC/DC power equipment

(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU

(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power switch for the RRU

(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment (6) PSU

(7) Monitoring ports (8) DC output port (LOAD1)

(9) DC output port (LOAD2) (10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries

Port

Table 4-13 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 4-13 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment

Port Type Label Description Connector

AC powersupply socket

INPUT AC input port 3-pin male connector

Monitoringport

RS232 Reserved -

RS485 Monitoring port for the PSU RJ45 connector

COM Reserved -

DC output port LOAD1 Power port (10 A) for theBBU and HEUA

H4

LOAD2 Power port (20 A) for thetransmission equipment

H4

BATT Power port (20 A) for thebatteries

H4

DC outputwiringterminals

RRU Wiring terminal for feedingpower (12 A) into the RRUpower cable

OT terminal

TM Wiring terminal for feedingpower (4 A) into thetransmission equipment

OT terminal



223

IndicatorTable 4-14 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 4-14 Indicators on the panel of the PSU

Label Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Running statusindicator

Steady on The module is running properly.

Steady off An error occurs during the runningof the module.

ALARM Yellow Alarm indicator Steady on An output overcurrent alarm orovertemperature alarm isgenerated.

Blinking The communication is interrupted.

Steady off The module is running properly.

FAULT Red Fault indicator Steady on A fan fault, output overvoltage, orexternal short circuit occurs.


Table 4-15 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC powerequipment.

Table 4-15 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module



Blinking (onfor 1s and offfor 1s)

The module is running properly.

Blinking (onfor 0.125sand off for0.125s)

The module is functional butunable to communicate with thePMU properly.

ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on An alarm is generated.

Steady off No alarms is generated.

DIP SwitchFigure 4-18 shows the DIP switches.



224

Figure 4-18 DIP Switches

Table 4-16 describes the settings of the DIP switches.

Table 4-16 Settings of the DIP switches

No. Function Setting

1 to 5 Used to define thecommunication address ofthe PMU.

(1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0to Bit4, respectively. ONindicates 1, and OFFindicates 0.For example, if thecommunication address ofthe PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are setto ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are setto OFF.(2) The default settings are asfollows:1 (Bit0) is set to ON;2 (Bit1) is set to ON;3 (Bit2) is set to OFF;4 (Bit3) is set to OFF;5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.



225


6 Selects a baud rate forcommunicating with themain control unit.

When 6 is set to ON, the baudrate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 isset to OFF, the baud rate is19200 bit/s.

7 and 8 Reserved and undefined. 7 and 8 are set to OFF.

SpecificationsTable 4-17 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 4-17 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment

Item Specifications

Input voltage 220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 VAC110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to135/270 V AC

Frequency of the inputvoltage

45 Hz to 65 Hz

Output voltage Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC

Output current 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power

Surge protection capability 2 kV in differential mode4 kV in common mode

AC Surge Protection BoxThe AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.

ExteriorFigure 4-19 shows the panel of the AC surge protection box.



226

Figure 4-19 Panel of the AC surge protection box

(1) Alarm port (2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables

PortTable 4-18 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.

Table 4-18 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box

Name Label Description Connector

Alarm port SPD ALM Port for reporting theAC input surgeprotection alarm

(2) 2-Pin cord endterminal

Wiring terminals forthe input powercables

L Wiring terminal forthe AC input powercable

OT terminal

N

PE

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03CThe Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to eachcomponent in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified



227

into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and applicationscenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.

Exterior

Figure 4-20 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.

Figure 4-20 DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

Functions

The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breakerconfigurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed andseparated base stations.

Table 4-19 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.

Table 4-19 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal

PowerConsumptionEquipment

circuitbreakerSpecification

circuitbreakerQuantity

Application Scenario

DCDU-03B LOAD0 toLOAD5

RRU 20 A 6 Distributedbase station/Mini basestationLOAD6 to

LOAD8BBU and thetransmissionequipment ofthe customer

12 A 3

DCDU-03C LOAD0 toLOAD5

Transmission equipmentof thecustomer

12 A 6 Separatedmacro basestation in the-48 V DCpowersupply/LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1



228

DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal





LOAD7 Transmission equipmentof thecustomer

Transmission cabinet

6 A 1

LOAD8 Fan box 6 A 1

Ports

Figure 4-21 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.

Figure 4-21 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

Table 4-20 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.

Table 4-20 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

Port Specification Power Cable Cross-Sectional Area

Remarks

DC inputterminal

Supports theM6 2-hole OTterminal (oneinput)

Maximum = 25mm2,default = 16mm2,

When the DCDU-03C is usedin the transmission cabinet,the cross-sectional area of theinput power cable is 4 mm2.



229


Remarks

DC outputterminal

Supports theM4 single holeOT terminal (9outputs)

Maximum = 6mm2 l The specification for apower cable depends onthe device to which thecable is connected. Forexample, the specificationfor a fan power cable is 2.5mm2.

l Three rows of wiringterminals for outputs:NEG(-), RTN(+), andPGND, where, the lastthree pairs of the PGNDwiring terminals supportthe grounding of the M4 2-hole OT terminals, whichare marked in red inFigure 4-21

SPD ALM SPD ALM - This port is unavailable.

Technical SpecificationsTable 4-21 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.

Table 4-21 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U (44.45mm or 1.75 in.) high and can be installed in a19 inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are asfollows:l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x

17.4 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mountingears)

l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)

Surge protection specifications of ports onDCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

-48 V DC port, differential mode: 10kA(8/20μs)

-48 V DC port, common mode: 20kA(8/20μs)



230

4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)This section describes the components in the OMB (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.OMBis short for outdoor mini box.

HEUBThe heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the statusof the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surgeprotection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

PanelFigure 4-22 shows the HEUB panel.

Figure 4-22 HEUB panel

(1) ELU (2) ExtFAN (3) IntFAN

(4) TEM (5) AC_SPD (6) GATE

(7) COM_IN (8) COM_OUT (9) PWR

FunctionsThe HEUB performs the following functions:l Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly.l Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information.l Collects the surge protection alarm information of power equipment when AC power is

used.l Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature

or controlled by the BBU.



231

l Reports collected information to the BBU.

PortsTable 4-22 describes the ports on the HEUB.

Table 4-22 Ports on the HEUB


ELU RJ45 connector Electronic label port

ExtFAN 4-pin connector Power port for the outer aircirculation fan

IntFAN 4-pin connector Power port for the inner aircirculation fan

TEM 4-pin connector Port connected to thetemperature sensor

AC_SPD Bare wire Port for collecting the ACinput surge protection alarm

GATE Bare wire Port for the door status sensor

COM_IN RJ45 connector Port for reporting monitoringsignals

COM_OUT RJ45 connector Port connected to theETP48100-A1

PWR 3V3 power connector -48 V DC input port

ETP48100-A1The embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external 220 V or 110V AC input power into -48 V DC power.

ETP48100-A1 Components

The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) system consists of thepower monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A), power supply unit (PSU), and ETP48100-A1 subrack.

Figure 4-23 shows the ETP48100-A1 components.



232

Figure 4-23 ETP48100-A1 components

(1) PMU 11A (2) PSU (3) ETP48100-A1 subrack

ETP48100-A1 Subrack

The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) subrack houses the PMU11A and PSU. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power.

Exterior

Figure 4-24 shows an ETP48100-A1 subrack.

Figure 4-24 ETP48100-A1 subrack

(1) AC input terminal (2) Circuit breaker (3) DC output terminal

Table 4-23 describes the ports on an ETP48100-A1 subrack.

Table 4-23 Ports on an ETP48100-A1 subrack

Port Silkscreen Connector

AC input terminal INPUT OT terminal

Circuit breaker LOAD0/LOAD1 -

DC output terminal OUTPUT OT terminal



233

PMU 11A

The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors powerdistribution, and reports alarms.

Exterior

Figure 4-25 shows a PMU 11A.

Figure 4-25 PMU 11A

Functions

The PMU 11A performs the following functions:

l Manages the power system.

l Reports the battery temperature.

l Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.

Ports

Figure 4-26 shows the ports on the PMU 11A and Table 4-24 describes these ports.

Figure 4-26 Ports on the PMU 11A



234

Table 4-24 Ports on the PMU 11A

No. Silkscreen Connector Description

1 GATE 2-pin connector Connects to a door statussensor

2 TEM_BAT 2-pin connector Reserved for a batterytemperature sensor

3 COM_IN RJ45 connector Connects to the BBU orupper-level device andreports alarms to theBBU.

4 COM_OUT RJ45 connector Connects to the BBU orlower-level devices andcollects alarms fromlower-level devices.

5 COM_485 RJ45 connector Reserved

IndicatorsTable 4-25 describes the indicators on the PMU 11A.

Table 4-25 Indicators on the PMU 11A

Silkscreen

Color Description Status Description


Steady on The PMU 11A is performingstartup, self-check, loading andactivation.


The PMU 11A is functional andcommunicating with the BBUproperly. (This status does notnecessarily mean that the PMU11A has been configured.)


The PMU 11A is functional butunable to communicate properly.

Steady off The PMU 11A is faulty or there isno DC power supply.





235

Silkscreen

Color Description Status Description


An alarm is generated and you needto locate the fault before decidingwhether to replace the PMU 11A.

DIP Switches

Figure 4-27 shows the DIP switches on the PMU 11A.

Figure 4-27 DIP switches on the PMU 11A



DIP Bit Function Setting

Four leastsignificant bits (1,2, 3, and4)

Define themonitoring addressof the PMU.

The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits1 to 4 are set to 1100 by default before delivery.

Four mostsignificant bits (5,6, 7, and8)

Reserved for futureuse.

The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits5 to 8 are set to 0000 by default before delivery.

PSU

The power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.



236

Functions

The PSU implements the following functions:

l Converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. The power monitoring unit(PMU) adjusts the output voltage.

l Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overheat.

l Dissipates heat using built-in fans.

Exterior

Figure 4-28 shows the PSU exterior.

Figure 4-28 PSU exterior

NOTE

A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of thePSU.

Indicators

Figure 4-29 shows the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.

Figure 4-29 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU

(1) Power indicator (2) Protection indicator (3) Fault indicator

Table 4-27 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.



237

Table 4-27 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU

Indicator

Color Status Description

Powerindicator

Green Steady on The PSU is functioning properly.

Steady off The PSU is experiencing a mains supplyfault, or the PSU is faulty.

Protectionindicator

Yellow Steady off The PSU is functioning properly.

Steady on An alarm triggered by an external factor isgenerated.

Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)

The communication between the PSU and thePMU is interrupted.

Faultindicator

Red Steady off The PSU is functioning properly.

Steady on The PSU is faulty or shut down in case of anemergency. Diagnose the fault to determinewhether to replace the PSU.

PDU10D-01

The power distribution unit 10D-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power to all componentsin the cabinet.

Exterior

Figure 4-30 shows a PDU10D-01.

Figure 4-30 PDU10D-01



238

Functions

The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions:

l Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.

l Provides ten DC outputs with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, andtwo reserved.

Ports

Figure 4-31 shows ports on the PDU10D-01 and Table 4-28 describes these ports.

Figure 4-31 Ports on the PDU10D-01

Table 4-28 Ports on the PDU10D-01

No.

Port Silkscreen MatchedTerminal andCable

Description

1 DC inputterminals

NEG(-) One-hole OTterminal (M6). Themaximum cross-sectional area of thecable supported is25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)for one input or 16mm2 (0.025 in.2) fortwo inputs.

Negative power input wiringterminal

RTN(+) Positive power input wiringterminal



239

No.


Description

2 AC inputterminals

L, N, PE One-hole OTterminal (M4). Themaximum cross-sectional area of thecable supported is 4mm2 (0.0062 2).

The maximum input currentfor a single input is 30 A.

3 DC outputterminals

LOAD0 toLOAD5

Figure 4-32 showsthe EPC5connectors for portsLOAD0 to LOAD5.The maximumcross-sectional areaof the cable is 10mm2 (0.016 in.2).

The output current is 30 A.

4 DC outputterminals

LOAD6 toLOAD9

Figure 4-33 showsan EPC4/EPC6connector, whichapplies to any oneamong portsLOAD6 to LOAD9.The maximumcross-sectional areaof the cable is 4mm2 (0.006 in.2).NOTE

Figure 4-33 showsan EPC4 or EPC6connector. An EPC4connector must beconnected to a cableonsite, whereas anEPC6 connector hasbeen connected to acable beforedelivery. The EPC5connector must beconnected to thecable onsite.

The output current is 30 A.



240

No.


Description

5 Spare fusebox

- - There are three fuses in thespare fuse box:l Two 5 A spare fuses, each

used for transferringpower less than 150 W.

l One 30 A spare fuse, usedfor the 30 A output powerports on the PDU10D-01.

Figure 4-32 Exterior of an EPC5 connector

Figure 4-33 Exterior of an EPC4 or EPC6 connector

AC Surge Protection BoxThe AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.

ExteriorFigure 4-34 shows the panel of an AC surge protection box.



241

Figure 4-34 Panel of the AC surge protection box

(1) AC surge protection box (2) Alarm port (3) AC power supply ports

Ports

Table 4-29 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.

Table 4-29 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box

Port Type Silkscreen Connector Description

Port for alarmreporting

ALARM Bare wire Port for collectingthe AC input surgeprotection alarm

AC power supplyport

L Cord end terminal AC power supplyport

N

PE

4.4.4 Components in the IMB03This section describes the components in the IMB03 configured for the DBS3900.

AC/DC Power Equipment

The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distributionbox with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC powerto the components in the cabinet.



242

Exterior

Figure 4-35 shows the AC/DC power equipment.

Figure 4-35 AC/DC power equipment

(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU

(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power switch for the RRU

(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment (6) PSU

(7) Monitoring ports (8) DC output port (LOAD1)

(9) DC output port (LOAD2) (10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries

Port

Table 4-30 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 4-30 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment


AC powersupply socket

INPUT AC input port 3-pin male connector

Monitoringport

RS232 Reserved -

RS485 Monitoring port for the PSU RJ45 connector

COM Reserved -

DC output port LOAD1 Power port (10 A) for theBBU and HEUA

H4

LOAD2 Power port (20 A) for thetransmission equipment

H4

BATT Power port (20 A) for thebatteries

H4

DC outputwiringterminals

RRU Wiring terminal for feedingpower (12 A) into the RRUpower cable

OT terminal



243


TM Wiring terminal for feedingpower (4 A) into thetransmission equipment

OT terminal

Indicator

Table 4-31 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 4-31 Indicators on the panel of the PSU



Steady on The module is running properly.

Steady off An error occurs during the runningof the module.

ALARM Yellow Alarm indicator Steady on An output overcurrent alarm orovertemperature alarm isgenerated.

Blinking The communication is interrupted.


FAULT Red Fault indicator Steady on A fan fault, output overvoltage, orexternal short circuit occurs.


Table 4-32 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC powerequipment.

Table 4-32 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module




The module is running properly.


The module is functional butunable to communicate with thePMU properly.




244



DIP SwitchFigure 4-36 shows the DIP switches.

Figure 4-36 DIP Switches




245



1 to 5 Used to define thecommunication address ofthe PMU.

(1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0to Bit4, respectively. ONindicates 1, and OFFindicates 0.For example, if thecommunication address ofthe PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are setto ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are setto OFF.(2) The default settings are asfollows:1 (Bit0) is set to ON;2 (Bit1) is set to ON;3 (Bit2) is set to OFF;4 (Bit3) is set to OFF;5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.

6 Selects a baud rate forcommunicating with themain control unit.

When 6 is set to ON, the baudrate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 isset to OFF, the baud rate is19200 bit/s.

7 and 8 Reserved and undefined. 7 and 8 are set to OFF.

Specifications

Table 4-34 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 4-34 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment

Item Specifications

Input voltage 220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 VAC110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to135/270 V AC

Frequency of the inputvoltage

45 Hz to 65 Hz

Output voltage Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC

Output current 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power



246

Item Specifications

Surge protection capability 2 kV in differential mode4 kV in common mode

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to eachcomponent in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classifiedinto the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and applicationscenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.

Exterior



Functions




DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal






RRU 20 A 6 Distributedbase station/



247

DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal





LOAD6 toLOAD8

Mini basestation

BBU and thetransmissionequipment ofthe customer

12 A 3



12 A 6 Separatedmacro basestation in the-48 V DCpowersupply/Transmission cabinet

LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1


6 A 1

LOAD8 Fan box 6 A 1

PortsFigure 4-38 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.





248



Remarks

DC inputterminal




DC outputterminal





Technical Specifications

Table 4-37 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.


Item Specification








249

Item Specification


DCDU-12B

A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for allcomponents in the cabinet.

Exterior

Figure 4-39 and Figure 4-40 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.

Figure 4-39 Front view of a DCDU-12B

(1) DC input terminal (2) DC output terminal (3) Spare fuse box (4) Ground point

Figure 4-40 Rear view of a DCDU-12B

(1) Ground point

NOTE

The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:

l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects theequipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the openrack.

l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The groundpoint at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.



250

FunctionsThe DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet thepower distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.

Table 4-38 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.

Table 4-38 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B

DCDU Type DC outputports

Power-ConsumingDevice

Specification of theFuse

Remarks


RRU0 to RRU5 30 A l BTS3900l BTS3900Al DBS3900l Mini NodeB

LOAD6 BBU ortransmissiondevice


LOAD8 EMUA ortransmissiondevice

LOAD9 Fan assembly

NOTE

It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:

l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.

l The LOAD6 to LOAD8 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 1.5mm2 (0.002in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.

l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.

PortsFigure 4-41 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.



251

Figure 4-41 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel

Table 4-39 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.

Table 4-39 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel

No.

Port Silkscreen Matched Terminaland Cable

Remarks

(1) DC inputterminals

NEG(-) One-hole OTterminal (M6) withtwo inputs. Themaximum cross-sectional area of thecable is 35 mm2

(0.054 in.2) in oneinput or 25 mm2

(0.039 in.2)in twoinputs. The defaultcross-sectional areais 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2).





252

No.


Remarks

(2) Fuseblock

LOAD0 toLOAD9

- It controls ports LOAD0 toLOAD9, and therefore controlsthe power supplies to the BBU,fan assemblies, andtransmission equipment.The indicator on the fuse blockindicates the status of the fuse.l When the indicator is steady

on, the fuse is faulty andneeds to be replaced.

l When the indicator is steadyoff, the fuse is workingproperly.



253

No.


Remarks

(3) DCoutputports

LOAD0 toLOAD9

l Figure 4-42shows the EPC5connectors forports LOAD0 toLOAD5. Thecross-sectionalarea of the cable is3.3mm2 (0.005 in.2) to 10mm2

(0.015 in.2).l Figure 4-43

shows an EPC4/EPC6 connector,which applies toany one amongports LOAD6 toLOAD9. Thecross-sectionalarea of the cable is1.5mm2 (0.002 in.2) to 4mm2(0.006in.2).

NOTEFigure 4-43 shows anEPC4 or EPC6connector. An EPC4connector must beconnected to a cableonsite, whereas anEPC6 connector hasbeen connected to acable before delivery.The EPC5 connectormust be connected tothe cable onsite.

For the specifications of the DCoutput, see Table 4-38.

(4) Sparefuse box

- - There are three 30 A spare fusesin the spare fuse box.

NOTE

Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.



254



Technical SpecificationsTable 4-40 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.

Table 4-40 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can beinstalled in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Itsdimensions are as follows:l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4

in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x

19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)

Surge Protection Specifications -48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 μs)differential mode

-48 V DC power port, 20 kA (8/20 μs)common mode

4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch RackThis section describes the components to be used for installing the BBU3900 on a wall or 19-inch rack.

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03CThe Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to eachcomponent in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified



255

into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and applicationscenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.

Exterior



Functions




DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal






RRU 20 A 6 Distributedbase station/Mini basestationLOAD6 to

LOAD8BBU and thetransmissionequipment ofthe customer

12 A 3



12 A 6 Separatedmacro basestation in the-48 V DCpowersupply/LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1



256

DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal






Transmission cabinet

6 A 1

LOAD8 Fan box 6 A 1

Ports

Figure 4-45 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.





Remarks

DC inputterminal






257


Remarks

DC outputterminal





Technical SpecificationsTable 4-43 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.


Item Specification









258

DCDU-11B and DCDU-11CThe DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supplypower to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.

ExteriorFigure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11Crespectively.

Figure 4-46 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

Figure 4-47 Rear view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C



259

NOTE

The DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B usesthe equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios:

l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the openrack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears.

l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device,which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear ofthe DCDU-11B.

Function

The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breakerconfigurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro basestation.

Table 4-44 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.


DCDUType

DCOutputTerminal

Equipment CircuitBreakerSpecifications

CircuitBreaker

Description

DCDU-11B

LOAD0toLOAD5

RRU0 to RRU5 25 A SW0 toSW5

Distributed ormini base station

LOAD6 BBU or transmissionequipment

25 A SW6


25 A SW7

LOAD8 EMUA ortransmissionequipment

25 A SW8

LOAD9 Fan assembly 25 A SW9

DCDU-11C

LOAD0 Transmissionequipment

6 A SW0 -48 V outdoormacro basestation ortransmissioncabinet


6 A SW1


12 A SW2


12 A SW3


25 A SW4



260

DCDUType

DCOutputTerminal

Equipment CircuitBreakerSpecifications

CircuitBreaker

Description


25 A SW5


25 A SW6


25 A SW7

LOAD8 EMUA ortransmissionequipment

25 A SW8

LOAD9 Fan assembly 25 A SW9

PortsFigure 4-48 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.


Table 4-45 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.



261

Table 4-45 Specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

SN

Port Label Terminal andCable

Description

(1) DC inputterminal

NEG(-) One-hole OTterminal (M6) withtwo inputs. Themaximum cross-sectional area of thecable is 35mm2

(0.054 in.2) in oneinput or 25mm2

(0.039in.2) in twoinputs.





262

SN

Port Label Terminal andCable

Description

(2) DCoutputterminal

LOAD0 toLOAD9

DCDU-11B:l Figure 4-49

shows an tool-less femaleconnector(pressfit type)adapting toLOAD0 toLOAD5terminals. Thecross-sectionalarea is 3.3mm2

(0.005 in.2) to10mm2 (0.015 in.2).

l Figure 4-50shows an tool-less femaleconnector(pressfit type)adapting toLOAD6 toLOAD9terminals. Themaximum cross-sectional area is1.5mm2 (0.002 in.2) to 4mm2(0.006in.2).

DCDU-11C: Figure4-50 shows an tool-less female connector(pressfit type)adapting to LOAD0to LOAD9 terminals.The cross-sectionalarea is 1.5mm2

(0.002 in.2) to 4mm2

(0.006 in.2).

For details about DC outputspecifications, see Table 4-44.

(3) Circuitbreaker

SW0 to SW9 - The circuit breakers SW0 toSW9 control the ports LOAD0to LOAD9 respectively,controlling the power suppliesto the BBU, fan assembly, andtransmission equipment.



263

Figure 4-49 tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (1)

Figure 4-50 tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (2)

Technical SpecificationsTable 4-46 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C.

Table 4-46 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C

Item Specification




Surge protection specifications of ports onDCDU-11B or DCDU-11C





264

DCDU-12B

A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for allcomponents in the cabinet.

Exterior

Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.

Figure 4-51 Front view of a DCDU-12B

(1) DC input terminal (2) DC output terminal (3) Spare fuse box (4) Ground point

Figure 4-52 Rear view of a DCDU-12B

(1) Ground point

NOTE

The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:

l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects theequipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the openrack.

l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The groundpoint at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.

Functions

The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet thepower distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.

Table 4-47 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.



265

Table 4-47 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B

DCDU Type DC outputports

Power-ConsumingDevice

Specification of theFuse

Remarks


RRU0 to RRU5 30 A l BTS3900l BTS3900Al DBS3900l Mini NodeB



LOAD8 EMUA ortransmissiondevice

LOAD9 Fan assembly

NOTE

It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:

l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.

l The LOAD6 to LOAD8 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 1.5mm2 (0.002in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.

l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.

PortsFigure 4-53 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.

Figure 4-53 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel



266

Table 4-48 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.

Table 4-48 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel

No.


Remarks

(1) DC inputterminals

NEG(-) One-hole OTterminal (M6) withtwo inputs. Themaximum cross-sectional area of thecable is 35 mm2

(0.054 in.2) in oneinput or 25 mm2

(0.039 in.2)in twoinputs. The defaultcross-sectional areais 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2).



(2) Fuseblock

LOAD0 toLOAD9

- It controls ports LOAD0 toLOAD9, and therefore controlsthe power supplies to the BBU,fan assemblies, andtransmission equipment.The indicator on the fuse blockindicates the status of the fuse.l When the indicator is steady

on, the fuse is faulty andneeds to be replaced.

l When the indicator is steadyoff, the fuse is workingproperly.



267

No.


Remarks

(3) DCoutputports

LOAD0 toLOAD9

l Figure 4-54shows the EPC5connectors forports LOAD0 toLOAD5. Thecross-sectionalarea of the cable is3.3mm2 (0.005 in.2) to 10mm2

(0.015 in.2).l Figure 4-55

shows an EPC4/EPC6 connector,which applies toany one amongports LOAD6 toLOAD9. Thecross-sectionalarea of the cable is1.5mm2 (0.002 in.2) to 4mm2(0.006in.2).

NOTEFigure 4-55 shows anEPC4 or EPC6connector. An EPC4connector must beconnected to a cableonsite, whereas anEPC6 connector hasbeen connected to acable before delivery.The EPC5 connectormust be connected tothe cable onsite.

For the specifications of the DCoutput, see Table 4-47.

(4) Sparefuse box

- - There are three 30 A spare fusesin the spare fuse box.

NOTE

Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.



268



Technical Specifications

Table 4-49 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.

Table 4-49 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can beinstalled in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Itsdimensions are as follows:l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4

in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x

19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)

Surge Protection Specifications -48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 μs)differential mode

-48 V DC power port, 20 kA (8/20 μs)common mode

4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal EquipmentThe equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineeringspecifications.

The equipment installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, and TMC11H (Ver.A) mustmeet the following requirements for engineering specifications:



269

l Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-56)

– Width: 19 inches

– Depth: less than or equal to 310 mm (12.2 in.) for the equipment using natural ventilationor dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 280 mm (11.02 in.) for theequipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear.

– Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.)l Requirement for air vents:

– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the rightand left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front toback.

– If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must bereserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.

l Requirement for temperature:

Table 4-50 Temperature requirements for user equipment

Highest EnvironmentalTemperature

Lowest OperatingTemperature of the UserEquipment

Highest OperatingTemperature of the UserEquipment

Equal to or lower than 40°C

Equal to or lower than -10°C

Equal to or higher than 55°C

Higher than 40°C Equal to or lower than -10°C




270

Figure 4-56 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment

(1) Equipment using naturalventilation

(2) Equipment dissipating heat outfrom its left and right

(3) Equipment dissipating heat outfrom its front and rear

The equipment installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.B), andTMC11H (Ver.C) must meet the following requirements for engineering specifications:l Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-56)

– Width: 19 inch

– Depth: less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the equipment using naturalventilation or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 250 mm (9.84 in.) forthe equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear.

– Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.)l Requirement for air vents:

– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the rightand left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front toback.

– If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must bereserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.

l Requirement for temperature:



271

Table 4-51 Temperature requirements for user equipment

Highest EnvironmentalTemperature

Lowest OperatingTemperature of the UserEquipment

Highest OperatingTemperature of the UserEquipment

Equal to or lower than 40°C

Equal to or lower than -10°C


Higher than 40°C Equal to or lower than -10°C


Figure 4-57 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment

(1) Equipment using naturalventilation

(2) Equipment dissipating heat outfrom its left and right

(3) Equipment dissipating heat outfrom its front and rear



272

5 DBS3900 Power System

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. WhenAC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to-48 V DC power for the base station.

Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900.

Table 5-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges

Power Input Type Rated Voltage Working Voltage

220 V AC single-phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC

220/380 V AC three-phase 200/346 V AC to 240/415 VAC

176/304 V AC to 290/500 VAC

110 V AC dual-live-wire 100/200 V AC to 120/240 VAC

90/180 V AC to 135/270 VAC

Table 5-2 -48 V DC input voltage range

Power Supply Rated Voltage

-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Table 5-3 +24 V DC input voltage range

Power Supply Rated Voltage

+24 V DC +21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

DBS3900Hardware Description 5 DBS3900 Power System


273

5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power CablesThis section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables invarious DBS3900 cabinets.

5.2 Power Distribution SchemesThis section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in thepower supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.



274

5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers andPower Cables

This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables invarious DBS3900 cabinets.

5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet

This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables for the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The recommended configurations areall based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules inthe cabinet and the maximum configurations of cabinet combinations. The power requirementsfor the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.

NOTE

In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled bya pole.

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supply in the APM30 or APM30H(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesare listed in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the APM30 orAPM30H (Ver.A)

Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreakers onCustomerEquipment

Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable

Length of theInput Power Cable

220 V AC single-phase

1 x 32 A/1 P 4mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

220 V AC three-phase

1 x 20 A/3 P 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

110 V AC dual-live-wire

1 x 32 A/2 P 4mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supply in the TMC or TMC11H(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesare listed in Table 5-5.



275

Table 5-5 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the TMC orTMC11H (Ver.A)




-48 V DC Minimum: 1 x 63 A/1 P, maximum: 1 x 80A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

This section lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for theAPM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). APM30H is short for advanced power module with aheat exchanger. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured basestation, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximumconfigurations of cabinet combinations. The power capacities for the customer equipment in thecabinet are also included.

NOTE


When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU3900 is installedin the APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables are listed in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in theAPM30H (Ver.B)





1x50 A/1 P 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


1x50 A/2 P


1x25 A/3 P 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)



276

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed inthe APM30H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables are listed in Table 5-7.

Table 5-7 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in theAPM30H (Ver.C)





1x63 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


1x63 A/2 P 16mm2


1x25 A/3 P 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed inthe TMC11H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables are listed in Table 5-8. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heatexchanger.

Table 5-8 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in theTMC11H (Ver.B)




-48 V DC Minimum: 1x63 A/1P, maximum: 1x80A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed inthe TMC11H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables are listed in Table 5-9.



277

Table 5-9 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in theTMC11H (Ver.C)

MaximumConfiguration (1)

(2)(3)

MinimumSpecification ofthe CircuitBreakers onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)

Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable

Length ofthe InputPowerCable

l 4 to 6 RRUs(power < 300 W)

l 1 BBUl Transmission

equipment(power ≤ 350W) (6)

1x80 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group ofDC input power cables

≤ 10 m(32.81 ft)





l 4 to 6 RRUs (400W ≤ power <560 W)



1x160 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smokezero halogen (LSZH), a groupof DC input power cables

2x80 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables(7)






l 1 BBU




278


(2)(3)




l Transmissionequipment(power ≤ 350W) (6)






l 3 RRUs (power <300 W)

l 3 RRUs (300 W≤ power < 400W)



1x100 A 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smokezero halogen (LSZH), a groupof DC input power cables (7)

2x63 A 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables











279


(2)(3)










280

NOTE

(1) The maximum power of different types of RRUs is as follows:

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3008,RRU3805, RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203,RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3841,RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, andRRU3942.

(2) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuitbreakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.

(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers isbased on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originallyconfigured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, thecircuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.

(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.DCDU-11B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.

(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smallerconfigurations.

(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smallerload. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order of load capacity as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A >2x63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A

(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakerscorresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuitbreakers that support 350 W.

(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:

l Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.

l Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.

l Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.

l To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs andthen turn on the circuit breakers for all TRXs in the base station. To power off the base station, firstturn off the circuit breakers for all TRXs and then turn off the circuit breakers for both groups ofpower inputs.

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied, a heater must be installed ina TMC cabinet, and one more AC power input must be added. The recommended configurationsof circuit breakers and power cables in this circumstance are listed in Table 5-10.

Table 5-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cablesfor the heater

Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment

Description ofInput Power Cable


220 V AC single-phase power

1 x 10 A/1 P 1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2) ≤ 15 m (39.37 ft.)



281

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with +24 V DC power supplied and is configured witha APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and powercables are listed in Table 5-11.

Table 5-11 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables inthe APM30H (Ver.B)




+24 V DC Minimum: 1x160 A,maximum: 2x100 A

25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)This section lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for theAPM30H (Ver.D). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat exchanger. Therecommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which means thefull configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum configurations of combinedcabinets. The power requirements of customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.

NOTE


When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed inthe APM30H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables are listed in Table 5-12.

Table 5-12 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables inthe APM30H (Ver.D)





1x40 A/3 P 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)


1x100 A/1 P



282

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed inthe TMC11H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables are listed in Table 5-13.

Table 5-13 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables inthe TMC11H (Ver.D)


(2)(3)

MinimumSpecification ofthe CircuitBreakers on theCustomerEquipment(4)(5)





equipment(power ≤ 350W)(6)

1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group ofDC input power cables

≤ 10 m(32.81 ft)








1x160 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smokezero halogen (LSZH), a groupof DC input power cables

2x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables(7)







283


(2)(3)







1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a groups ofDC input power cables(7)










2x63 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables









284


(2)(3)










l 7 to 9 RRUs(powerconsumption ≤300 W)

l 1 or 2 BBUs

1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables


l 1 or 2 BBUs

1x100 A/1 P+1x63A/1 P

35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), a group ofDC input power cables


2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), threegroups of DC input powercables

l 7 to 9 RRUs(powerconsumption ≤560 W)

l 1 or 2 BBUs

1x160 A/1 P+1x80A/1 P

35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smokezero halogen (LSZH), a groupof DC input power cables


2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (default)


l 12 RRUs (powerconsumption ≤300 W)

l 1 or 2 BBUs

2x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables



285


(2)(3)




l 12 RRUs (300 W≤ powerconsumption ≤400 W)

l 1 or 2 BBUs

1x100 A/1 P+1x80A/1 P



2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P


l 12 RRUs (powerconsumption ≤560 W)

l 1 or 2 BBUs

2x160 A/1 P 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smokezero halogen (LSZH), twogroup of DC input power cables

4x80 A/1 P (default) 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groupsof DC input power cables



286

NOTE

(1) The maximum power of different types of RRUs is as follows:

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3008,RRU3805, RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203,RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.

l The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3841,RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, andRRU3942.


(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers isbased on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originallyconfigured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, thecircuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.

(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.DCDU-12B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.

(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smallerconfigurations.

(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smallerload. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A > 2x63 A > 100A > 80 A > 63 A

(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakerscorresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuitbreakers that support 350 W.

(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:

l Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.

l Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.

l Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.

l To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs andthen turn on the circuit breakers for all TRX modules in the base station. To power off the base station,first turn off the circuit breakers for all TRX modules and then turn off the circuit breakers for bothgroups of power inputs.

5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB(Ver.C)

This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cable for the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet. The recommended configurations are allbased on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in thecabinet and the maximum configurations of combined cabinets. The power requirements of thecustomer equipment in the cabinet are also included.

When the BBU installed in an OMB or OMB (Ver.C) is supplied with power from the customerequipment, the circuit breaker on the customer equipment should be of 15 A to 25 A.

When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB orOMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable areseparately listed in Table 5-14 and Table 5-15.



287

Table 5-14 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMBcabinet





1x10 A 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤40m


Table 5-15 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB(Ver.C) cabinet

Power Supply ProductConfiguration

Requirementfor the CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment

Cross-SectionalArea of thePower Cable

Length of theInput PowerCable

220 V ACsingle-phase

1PSU 20 A/1 P 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)

≤15m

2PSU 32 A/1 P


1PSU 20 A/2 P

2PSU 32 A/2 P

When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB orOMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable areseparately listed in Table 5-16 and Table 5-17.



288

Table 5-16 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable(with DC power supplied and OMB used)




-48 V DC Minimum: 1x63 A,maximum: 1x80 A(all using the level-1magnetic blastbreaker)

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤15m

Table 5-17 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable(with DC power supplied and OMB (Ver.C) used)

ProductConfiguration

Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment



l 1 to 3 RRUs(powerconsumption ofeach RRU ≤ 300W)

l 1 BBU (powerconsumption ≤450 W)

l Transmissionequipment(powerconsumption ≤200 W)

50 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)



289








80 A/1 P




63 A/1 P




100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)



290








80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)




125 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

l 3 RRUs (powerconsumption ofeach RRU ≤ 300W)

l 3 RRUs (300 W≤ powerconsumption ofeach RRU ≤ 400W)


l Transmissionequipment(power

80 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)



291





consumption ≤200 W)

2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)





100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)



100 A/1 P 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)



292







2x63 A/2 P 2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

NOTE

(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows:

l The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is equal to or less than 300 W: RRU3804,RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, and RRU3004.

l The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3908,RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3828,RRU3928, and RRU3222.

l The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3829,RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240,RRU3229, RRU3241, and RRU3942.


5.1.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06,19-inch Rack or Wall

This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cable in the scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an IMB03/IFS06/19-inch rack or on a wall. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured basestation, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximumconfigurations of combined cabinets. The power requirements of the customer equipment in thecabinet are also included.

NOTE




293

When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03,the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately listed inTable 5-18 and Table 5-19. When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBUis installed in the 19-inch rack or on a wall indoors, the configurations of the upper-level circuitbreaker and power cable are separately listed in Table 5-19.

Table 5-18 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03is used in the AC power supply scenario





1x10 A 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2) ≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


Table 5-19 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03is used in the DC power supply scenario




-48 V DC Minimum: 1x63 A/1P, maximum: 1x80A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03+IFS06, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separatelylisted in Table 5-20 and Table 5-21.



294

Table 5-20 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03+IFS06 is used in the AC power supply scenario





1x16 A/3 P 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x32 A/1 P 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)


1x32 A/2 P

Table 5-21 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03+IFS06 is used in the DC power supply scenario




-48 V DC 1x80 A/1 P 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

+24 V DC 2x100 A/1 P1x160 A/1 P

25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)

5.1.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600ACabinet

This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers andpower cables for the TP48600A cabinet. The recommended configurations are all based on afully configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for thecustomer equipment in the cabinet are also included.

Table 5-22 lists the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and powercables for the TP48600A cabinet.



295

Table 5-22 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables

Power Supply ProductConfiguration

Requirementfor the CircuitBreakers onCustomerEquipment

Cross-SectionalArea of thePower Cable

Length of theInput PowerCable


7 power supplyunits (PSUs)+1service outletunit (SOU)

63 A/3 P(1)

(recommended)10 mm2 (0.016in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21ft)

4 to 6 PSUs+1SOU

40 A/3 P

4 to 7 PSUs+1HAU+1 SOU

63 A/3 P

220 V ACsingle-phase

7 PSUs+1 SOU 125 A/1 P(recommended)

35 mm2 (0.054in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21ft)

6 PSUs+1 SOU 125 A/1 P



6 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU

125 A/1 P

5 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU

125 A/1 P

4 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU

100 A/1 P


7 PSUs+1 SOU 125 A/2 P(recommended)

35 mm2 (0.054in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21ft)




NOTE

(1) P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.

5.2 Power Distribution SchemesThis section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in thepower supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.



296

5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet

This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the powerdistribution unit (PDU) in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power into DC power.

The PDU converts one AC power input into two AC outputs and ten DC outputs.

Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 VAC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the circuitbreakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios.

NOTE

When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to beconnected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are thesame as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.

Figure 5-1 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 220 V AC single-phase powersupply scenario



297

Figure 5-2 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire powersupply scenario

Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) inthe 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of thecircuit breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supplyscenarios.

Figure 5-3 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC single-phasepower supply scenario



298

Figure 5-4 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wirepower supply scenario

Table 5-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.B) inthe AC power supply scenario

Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakersfor the PDU

Specifications ofAC Output CircuitBreakers

Specifications ofDC Output CircuitBreakers andFuses

220 V AC single-phase/three-phase

3 x 16 A (MCB1) l Heater: 1 x 10 Al Heating film: 1 x

10 A

l RRU: 6 × 20 Al BBU: 1 × 12 Al FAN: 1 × 12 A

l TM2: 2 × 4 A110 V AC dual-live-wire

2 x 30 A (MCB)

NOTE

(1) Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)

(2) TM: Transmission equipment

When the DBS3900 uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmissioncabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan box,and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure5-5.



299

Figure 5-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses theAC power supply

Table 5-24 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when theDBS3900 uses the AC power supply

Table 5-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900uses the AC power supply

Application Scenario Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakers

APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) +Transmission cabinet

220 V AC l TM: 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1x 6 A (MCB)

l FAN: 1 x 6 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme in the -48V DC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the DBS3900 is supplied with -48 V DC power, the external power is supplied to theTMC/TMC11H (Ver.A), and forwarded to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components inthe cabinet through the DC power distribution box.

Figure 5-6 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A). Table 5-25lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A).



300

Figure 5-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC powersupply scenario

Table 5-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DCpower supply scenario

Cabinet Type Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers

TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 × 20 A (MCB)l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB)l TM: 1 x 12 A (MCB)l FAN: 1 x 12 A (MCB)

5.2.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC powersupply scenarios. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat exchanger.

Power Distribution Principles in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by theembedded power system (EPS) or embedded power subrack unit (EPU) and distributed tocomponents in the cabinet.

After going through the EPS or EPU, one AC power input is divided into two AC power outputs:

l One provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).



301

l One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four ACpower outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the batterycabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and otherequipment.

NOTE

When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to beconnected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are thesame as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.

Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) inthe 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-26 lists the specifications ofcircuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supplyscenarios.

Figure 5-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the220 V AC single-phase power supply



302

Figure 5-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the110 V AC dual-live power supply

Table 5-26 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) when theDBS3900 uses the AC power supply

Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPS




3x16 A (MCB(1)) l Heater and SOU:1x16 A (MCB)

l Battery (BAT)(2):1x100 A (MCB)

l RRU: 6x20 A(MCB)

l Transmissioncabinet (TMC):1x25 A (MCB)

l FAN: 1x15 A(FUSE(3))

l BBU: 2x15 A(FUSE)

l Thermoelectriccooling unit(TEC)(4): 1x15 A(FUSE)

l Transmissionequipment (TM)(5): 4x15 A(FUSE)


1x40 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x16 A(MCB)

l SOU: 1x16 A(MCB)



303

NOTE

(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker

(2) BAT: storage battery

(3) FUSE: fuse

(4) TM: transmission equipment

Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) inthe 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-27 lists the specifications ofcircuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supplyscenarios.

Figure 5-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the220 V AC single-phase power supply



304

Figure 5-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the110 V AC dual-live power supply

Table 5-27 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) when theDBS3900 uses the AC power supply

Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPS




3x20 A (MCB) l Heater and SOU:1x15 A (MCB)

l BAT: 1x160 A(MCB)

l RRU: 6x25 A(MCB)

l TMC: 1x30 A(MCB)

l FAN: 1x15 A(FUSE)

l BBU: 2x25 A(FUSE)

l TEC: 1x15 A(FUSE)

l TM: 4x15 A(FUSE)


1x63 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x15 A(MCB)

l SOU: 1x15 A(MCB)

When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to thetransmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmissionequipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distributionbox, as shown in Figure 5-11.



305

Figure 5-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 usesthe AC power supply

Table 5-28 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when theDBS3900 uses the AC power supply

Table 5-28 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900uses the AC power supply


Transmission cabinet l TM: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB)

When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to thetransmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmissionequipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distributionbox, as shown in Figure 5-12.



306


Table 5-29 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when theDBS3900 uses the AC power supply

Table 5-29 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900uses the AC power supply


Transmission cabinet l TM: 2x6 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB)+2x25A (MCB)

l TM/BBU: 2x25 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B), andthe DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fanassembly. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat exchanger

Figure 5-13 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 5-30 liststhe specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B).



307

Figure 5-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power supplyscenario

Table 5-30 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC powersupply scenario


TMC11H (Ver.B) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x20 A (MCB)l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C), andthe DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fanassembly.

Figure 5-14 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 5-31 liststhe specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C).



308

Figure 5-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power supplyscenario

Table 5-31 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC powersupply scenario


TMC11H (Ver.C) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x25 A (MCB)l BBU: 2x25 A (MCB)l TM: 1x25 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Principles in the +24 V DC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the DBS3900 is supplied with +24 V DC power, the +24 V DC power is converted to -48V DC power by the DC/DC power system in the APM30H (Ver.B) and forwarded to theDCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B provides power supply for the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly,transmission equipment, and other components.

Figure 5-15 shows the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 5-32 liststhe specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B).



309

Figure 5-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supplyscenario

Table 5-32 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC powersupply scenario


APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x20 A (MCB)l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or -48 VDC power supply scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D).


When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by theembedded power subrack unit (EPU, which is EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05) and distributed tocomponents in the cabinet.

The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs:

l One output provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).

l One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four ACpower outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.



310

The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the batterycabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and otherequipment.

NOTE

The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC single-phase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuitingbars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.

Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.D) inthe 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-33 lists the specifications ofcircuit breakers and fuses in the or APM30H (Ver.D) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC powersupply scenarios.

Figure 5-16 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 220 V AC single-phase power supply



311

Figure 5-17 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 110 V AC dual-livepower supply

Table 5-33 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses ACpower supply

Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPU




2x40 A+1x25 A Heater and SOU:1x16 A (MCB)

l BAT: 1x125 A/2P (MCB)

l RFC: 1x125 A(MCB)

l RRU 0 to RRU 5:6x30 A (FUSE)

l BBU: 2x30 A(FUSE)

l FAN: 1x30 A(FUSE)

l TM: 4x30 A(FUSE)

l TMC: 1x30 A(FUSE)

l IBBS: 1x30 A(FUSE)


1x100 A Heater: 1x16 A(MCB)SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)



312

NOTE

When a site is configured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU. Inthis case, the RFC1 terminal on the EPU feeds external DC power into the DCDU-12B, which providespower inputs for the RRUs, as shown in Figure 5-19.

When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to thetransmission cabinet. The DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides powersupply for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet, asshown in Figure 5-18.


Table 5-34 lists the specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 usesthe AC power supply

Table 5-34 Specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the ACpower supply

Cabinet Type Specifications of DC Output Fuses

TMC11H (Ver.D) serving as a transmissioncabinet

l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE)l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D), andthe DCDU-12B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) provides DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fanassembly.



313

Figure 5-19 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 5-35 liststhe specifications of fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D).

Figure 5-19 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC power supplyscenario

Table 5-35 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC powersupply scenario

Cabinet Type Specifications of DC Output Fuses

TMC11H (Ver.D)serving as a powercabinet

l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE)l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE)l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB(Ver.C)

This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or -48 VDC power supply scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an OMB or OMB(Ver.C).


When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC powerby the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to other components in the cabinet.



314

Figure 5-20 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB when the 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-36 lists the specifications of thecircuit breakers and fuses in the base station.

Figure 5-20 Power distribution principles for the OMB in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC powersupply scenario

Table 5-36 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station

Application Scenario Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakersand Fuses

OMB 220 V AC single-phase or110 V AC dual-live-wire

l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 Al RRU: 1x12 Al TM: 1x4 A

Figure 5-21 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) when the 220 V ACsingle-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-37 lists the specificationsof the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.

Figure 5-21



315



OMB (Ver.C) 220 V AC single-phase or110 V AC dual-live-wire

l BBU: 1x30 A (FUSE(1))l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6×30 A

(FUSE)l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

NOTE

(1) FUSE: fuse

Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the -48 V DC power is supplied, the DCDU feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and othercomponents in the cabinet.

Figure 5-22 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC power supplyscenario. Table 5-38 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.

Figure 5-22 Power Distribution Principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario



316



OMB -48 V DC l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A(MCB)

l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)l Transmission equipment:

1x12 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

Figure 5-23 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC powersupply scenario. Table 5-39 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the basestation.

Figure 5-23



317



OMB (Ver.C) -48 V DC l BBU: 1x30 A (FUSE)l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A

(FUSE)l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

5.2.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06,19-inch Rack or Wall

This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC,or +24 V DC power supply scenario when the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an IMB03/IFS06/19-inch rack or on a wall.

Power Distribution Principles in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC powerby the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to other components in the cabinet.

Figure 5-24 shows the power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario. Table 5-40 lists the specifications ofthe circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.

Figure 5-24 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC powersupply scenario



318



IMB03 220 V AC single-phase or110 V AC dual-live-wire

l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 Al RRU: 1x12 Al TM: 1x4 A

Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the -48 V DC power is supplied, the DCDU-03B feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, andother components in the cabinet.

Figure 5-25 shows the power distribution principles in the -48 V DC power supply scenariowhen the BBU is installed in an IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, or 19-inch rack, or on a wall. Table5-41 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.

Figure 5-25 Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario



319



IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, wall,and 19-inch rack

-48 V DC l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A(MCB)


1x12 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Principles in the +24 V DC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the +24 V DC power is supplied and the BBU is installed in the IMB03+IFS06, the +24V DC power is converted into -48 V DC power by the DC/DC power equipment in the IMB03and forwarded to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and othercomponents in the cabinet.

Figure 5-26 shows the power distribution principles for the IMB03. Table 5-42 lists thespecifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03.

Figure 5-26 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply scenario



320

Table 5-42 Specifications of circuit breakers in the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supplyscenario

Application Scenario Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakers

IMB03+IFS06 +24 V DC l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A(MCB)


1x12 A (MCB)l FAN: 1x12A (MCB)

5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600ACabinet

This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the TP48600Acabinet in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios.

When the TP48600A cabinet uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the AC powersupply is distributed by the PDU05A-03 and converted into DC power by the ETP. TheDCDU-11C and DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B distribute the DC power to the BBU, RRU,transmission equipment, and other components. PDU is short for power distribution unit, ETPis short for embedded telecommunication power, DCDU is short for direct current distributionunit, BBU is short for baseband unit, and RRU is short for remote radio unit.

After going through the PDU05A-03, an AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs.l One AC power output is connected to the junction box on the right of the cabinet door, and

divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.l Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs into DC

power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, andstorage batteries.

l One AC power output is provided for the SOU.

Figure 5-27 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC three-phase power is suppliedand the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 5-28 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V ACthree-phase power is supplied and the DCDU-03B is used. Table 5-43 lists the specificationsof circuit breakers.

The power distribution scheme for the cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 VAC dual-live-wire input power is the same as the power distribution scheme for the cabinetsupplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The difference among the power distributionschemes for the three types of power inputs lies in the configuration of the short-circuiting bars,as shown in Figure 5-29.



321

Figure 5-27 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power(DCDU-11B)



322

Figure 5-28 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power(DCDU-03B)

Table 5-43 Circuit breaker specification

Power DistributionEquipment

Specifications of ACOutput Circuit Breakers

Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakers

PDU05A-03 l PSU1/5: 1x40 Al PSU2/6: 1x40 Al PSU3/4/7: 1x63 Al HEATER: 1x25 Al SOU: 1x10 A

-



323

Power DistributionEquipment

Specifications of ACOutput Circuit Breakers

Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakers

ETP - l DCDU-11C: LOAD0(1x100 A)

l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B:LOAD3 (1x200 A) andLOAD5 (1x200 A)

l TMC11H (Ver.C):LOAD1 and LOAD2(1x100 A)

l Storage batteries:LOAD6 (1x400 A)

l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200A)

DCDU-11C - l Cabinet control unit(CCU): LOAD0 (1x6 A)

l Central monitoring unittype F (CMUF): LOAD1(1x6 A)

l Transmission equipment(TM)(1): LOAD2 (1x12A)

l Environment monitoringunit type A (EMUA)/TM:LOAD3 (1x12 A)

l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7(4x25 A)

l Environment monitoringunit type F (CMUF):LOAD8 (1x25 A)

l IBBS: LOAD9 (1x25 A)

DCDU-11B - l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5(6x25 A)

l SPARE: LOAD6 toLOAD9 (4x25 A)

DCDU-03B - l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5(6x20 A)

l SPARE: LOAD6 toLOAD8 (3x12 A)

NOTE

(1) TM: transmission equipment



324

Figure 5-29 Configuration of short-circuiting bars



325

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in thecabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU andUEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components toachieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.

6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) CabinetThe APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collectalarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBUthrough the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) CabinetThe APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boardscollect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signalsto the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.

6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)The APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms fromcomponents such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port onthe BBU through the RS485 serial bus.

6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoringboards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and report thealarms to the BBU.

6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03 or IFS06The IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. Themonitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, andreport the alarms to the BBU. IMB is short for indoor mini box, IFS is short for indoor floorinstallation support, and BBU is short for baseband unit.

6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A CabinetThe TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarmsfrom sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through theRS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

DBS3900Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System


326

6.7 Customized Alarm InputWhen an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.



327

6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 orAPM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet

The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collectalarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBUthrough the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

NOTE

The BBU in a DBS3900 can be installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet in a single- or dual-mode scenario.

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power SupplyScenario

Figure 6-1 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30+1TMC+1 BBC or with additional 1 APM30+1 BBC when the BBU is installed in the APM30.

NOTE

The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the descriptionabout the boards.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configuredonly in the APM30.

Figure 6-1 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30

APMI APMI

PMU AFMU

AFMU

BBC BBC

APM30 APM30

TMC

BBU

APMI

PMU AFMU

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

APMI

PMU AFMU

AFMU

BBC

APM30

TMC

BBU

Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarmsignal cable on the DCDU

Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarmsignal cable on the DCDU

APMI

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

MON0 / MON1ALM0/ALM1

TX RX

RS232/RS422

Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The devices monitored by theHEUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.



328

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU isconfigured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).

Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.A)

HPMI

PMU HEUA

BBC/IBBS

APM30H(Ver.A)

TMC11H(Ver.A)

BBU

HEUA

HPMI

PMU HEUA

BBC/IBBS

APM30H(Ver.A)

TMC11H(Ver.A)

BBU

HEUA

HPMI

PMU HEUA

BBC/IBBS

APM30H(Ver.A)


Door status sensor

Door status sensor

Door status sensor

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COMBAT

MON0 / MON1

TO PMU DB50

RS232/RS422

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 6-3 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs orTMC11Hs(Ver.A) when the BBU is installed in a TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A).l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC orTMC11H (Ver.A)

APMI/HEUA/CMUA

TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H

COM_IN / COM1

MON0 / MON1

BBU

APMI/HEUA/CMUA


6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boardscollect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signalsto the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.

Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). When the base station is configured with twoAPM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), the BBU is installed in the main APM30H (Ver.B)or APM30H (Ver.C), which is located to the left of another APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C).



329

NOTE

The CUMUA is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), and the CMUE is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) use the same monitoring scheme. The devices monitored bythe CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about theboards.

l For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.

l For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configuredonly in the APM30H (Ver.B).

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see PowerSubrack (DC/DC).

Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS or with additional1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).

Figure 6-4 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS

PMU

HPMI

CMUA/CMUE

IBBS

APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COM_485

COM

TO PMU DB50

MON0 / MON1

BBU

CMUA/CMUE

CMUA/CMUE

IBBS


BBU

CMUA/CMUE

IBBS


HPMI HPMI

PMU PMU

CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE


Figure 6-5 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs or with additional1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).



330

Figure 6-5 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs

PMU

HPMI

CMUA/CMUE

APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)

BBU

CMUA/CMUE

CMUA/CMUE

IBBSIBBS

CMUA/CMUE

CMUA/CMUE

APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)

BBU

CMUA/CMUE

CMUA/CMUE

IBBSIBBS

CMUA/CMUE

CMUA/CMUE


CMUA/CMUE

IBBS IBBS

CMUA/CMUE

PMU

HPMI

PMU

HPMI COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COM_485

COM

TO PMU DB50

MON0 / MON1


Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are poweredand monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the outdoor scenario.

Figure 6-6 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered andmonitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring scheme when two the BBU is configured in one of the twoTMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.

Figure 6-7 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H(Ver.B)



331

Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in theAPM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 6-8 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario

ALM

PRESENT

COM_IN APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)

EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1MON0 / MON1


BBU

CMUA

Power System(DC/DC)

Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base StationNOTE

BBU0 is the main or root BBU, and BBU1 is the extension or leaf BBU.

Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main APM30H(Ver.B) or main APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. BBU1 is installed in the extension APM30H(Ver.B) or extension APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. In a triple-mode base station, all monitoringdevices are connected to BBU0. The monitoring scheme for a triple-mode base station is thesame as a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, and Figure6-11.

Figure 6-9 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs



332

Figure 6-10 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBSs

Figure 6-11 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBUs are installed in the TMC11Hs(Ver.B)/TMC11Hs (Ver.C)

6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H(Ver.D)

The APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms fromcomponents such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port onthe BBU through the RS485 serial bus.

Cabinet Monitoring Scheme for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed inthe APM30H (Ver.D).



333

NOTE

The devices monitored by the CMUEA, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, seethe description about the boards.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUEA, see Central Monitoring Unit TypeEA (CMUEA).

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU.

Figure 6-12 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in theAPM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.

Figure 6-12 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)

Figure 6-13 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in theAPM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.

Figure 6-13 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)



334

The following figure illustrates the monitoring scheme for the base station configured with of 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T when the BBU is installed in theAPM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.

NOTE

The monitoring board in an IBBS700D cabinet is the CMUEA and the monitoring board in an IBBS700Tcabinet is the CMUF.

Figure 6-14 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T

Figure 6-15 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs arepowered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.

Figure 6-15 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered andmonitored by the APM30H (Ver.D)

Figure 6-16 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs(Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) that is supplied with -48 V DC power.



335

Figure 6-16 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H(Ver.D)

Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base StationNOTE

BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.

When the 220 V AC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station canbe installed in one APM30H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. Allmonitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with atransmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the APM30H (Ver.D) or in thetransmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme. Figure 6-17 and Figure6-18 show the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.

Figure 6-17 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)



336

Figure 6-18 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)

When the -48 V DC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station canbe installed in one TMC11H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. Allmonitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with atransmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the TMC11H (Ver.D) that serves as apower cabinet or in the transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme.Figure 6-19 shows the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.

Figure 6-19 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)

6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB orOMB (Ver.C)

The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoringboards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and report thealarms to the BBU.



337

Cabinet Monitoring Principles for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationNOTE

The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see thedescription about each board or module.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUB, see HEUB.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the OMB, see AC/DC PowerEquipment.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU 11A in the OMB (Ver.C), see PMU11A.

l Figure 6-20 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB in the110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-21 shows the monitoringprinciples for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.

Figure 6-20 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an ACOMB

Figure 6-21 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DCOMB

l Figure 6-22 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB (Ver.C)in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-23 shows the monitoringprinciples for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.

Figure 6-22 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an ACOMB (Ver.C)



338

Figure 6-23 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DCOMB (Ver.C)

6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03or IFS06

The IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. Themonitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, andreport the alarms to the BBU. IMB is short for indoor mini box, IFS is short for indoor floorinstallation support, and BBU is short for baseband unit.

Cabinet Monitoring Scheme for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationNOTE

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU on the AC/DC power equipment in theIMB03, see AC/DC Power Equipment.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the AC/DC power system in theIMB03, see PMU.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack(DC/DC).

NOTE

The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see thedescription about each board or module.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack

(DC/DC).

Cabinet Monitoring Scheme for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationFigure 6-24 shows the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 applying the indoor solution ofBBU+RRU+IMB03 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the BBUis installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely outside the IMB03.

Figure 6-24 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110 V/220 V)scenario

RS485

IMB03

MON0 / MON1 BBU

PMU




339

Figure 6-25 illustrates the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, theBBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed on the IFS06. Figure 6-26 shows themonitoring principles for the cabinet using the +24 V DC power supply.

Figure 6-25 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (110 V/220 V) scenario

COM_IN / COM1

IMB03

IMB03

MON0 / MON1BBU

PMU


Figure 6-26 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (+24 V)scenario

ALM

PRESENT

IMB03

IMB03

EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1BBU

Power System(DC/DC)


Monitoring Principles for a Triple-Mode Base StationNOTE

l The indoor solution of BBU+RRU+IMB03 does not support the triple-mode scenario. The solution ofBBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 supports the triple-mode scenario.

l BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.

When the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR is used in the triple-mode scenario, two BBUsneed to be configured: BBU 0 and BBU 1. BBU 0 is installed in No.0 IMB03. It monitors No.0 IMB03 and No.1 IMB03. BBU 1 is installed in No.3 IMB03. It monitors No.2 IMB03 and No.3 IMB03. For details, see Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-27 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110 V/220 V)scenario



340

Figure 6-28 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (-48 V) scenario

6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using theTP48600A Cabinet

The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarmsfrom sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through theRS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

Cabinet Monitoring Schemes of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which isinstalled in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-29 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-30 shows the monitoring schemefor the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

NOTE

The devices monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see thedescription about the boards. For monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.7 Customized Alarm Input.

l For the functions of the ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.

l For the functions of the ports on the PMU, see PMU.

l For the functions of the ports on the CCU, see CCU.

l For the positions of the CCU, CMUF, and PMU in different cabinets, see Configurations of CabinetsUsed by the DBS3900.

l When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connectedto the MON0 port on one of the boards, the MON0 port on the other board must not be used, and theMON1 ports cannot be connected to the CCU.



341

Figure 6-29 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1TMC11H (Ver.C)

Figure 6-30 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

NOTE

If a device is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lower-leveldevice. For example, if the HAU0 and HAU1 shown in Figure 6-29 are not configured, the monitoringsignal cable can directly connect the RS485 port on the EMUA to the CCU.



342

Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base StationTwo BBUs are configured in a triple-mode base station, and the two BBUs are installed in theTP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-31 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-32 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.

NOTE

In this document, BBU0 and BBU1 are used to exemplify two triple-mode BBUs.

l In a base station to be expanded, BBU0 is installed during initial site construction, and BBU1 is installedduring capacity expansion.

l In a new base station, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 works in LTE-only or UMTS-only mode.

Figure 6-31 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1TMC11H (Ver.C)



343

Figure 6-32 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

6.7 Customized Alarm InputWhen an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.

Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:l The alarms are collected by the UPEU/UEIU in the BBU. UPEU is short for universal

power and environment interface unit, and UEIU is short for universal environmentinterface unit.

l The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see therelated initial configuration guide. EMUA is short for environment monitoring unit typeA.

Monitoring Board ConfigurationsCustomer equipment monitored by the BBU must report customized alarms to the BBU.According to the number of required customized alarm inputs, the DBS3900 needs to beconfigured with different types of monitoring boards, as listed in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900

External PowerInput

ApplicationScenario

Number ofBoolean Outputsto Be Monitored

Monitoring BoardConfigurations

-48 V DC/220 V AC Indoor DBS3900(DBS3900 of whichthe BBU is installedindoors)

None UPEU

1 to 16 channels UPEU+UEIU



344

External PowerInput

ApplicationScenario

Number ofBoolean Outputsto Be Monitored

Monitoring BoardConfigurations

17 to 32 channels UPEU+UEIU+EMUA

Outdoor DBS3900(DBS3900 of whichthe BBU is installedoutdoors)

None UPEU

1 to 16 channels UPEU+UEIU+(2xUSLP2+SLPU)

17 to 32 channels UPEU+UEIU+EMUA

NOTE

l If backup power is required by the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU.

l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA.

l Two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) and one signal lightning protectionunit (SLPU) are delivered together.

l The EMUA with sensors can be configured, if required, for the indoor DBS3900.

Using the UPEU/UEIU to collect customized alarms

Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A UPEU and a UEIU ortwo UPEUs can be configured in a BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs. If 16 or fewercustomized alarm inputs are required, the UPEU/UEIU is used to collect the customized alarms.

When using this method, connect the equipment to be monitored to the SLPU for surgeprotection, and connect the SLPU to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure6-33.

Figure 6-33 Using the UPEU/UEIU to collect customized alarms

Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPUand then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU/UEIU by using BBU alarm cables.Table 6-2 describes the mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 and the customized alarmnumbers.



345

Table 6-2 Mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 on the USLP2 and the customizedalarm numbers

Pins ofthePortsIN0 toIN3

USLP2 in the Upper Slot USLP2 in the Lower Slot

IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3

1 4+ 5+ 0+ 1+ 12+ 13+ 8+ 9+

2 4-(GND)

5-(GND)

0-(GND)

1-(GND)

12-(GND)

13-(GND)

8-(GND)

9-(GND)

3 6-(GND)

7+ 2-(GND)

3+ 14-(GND)

15+ 10-(GND)

11+

4 6+ 7-(GND)

2+ 3-(GND)

14+ 15-(GND)

10+ 11-(GND)

For details about ports on the USLP2, see 3.3.5 USLP2. For details about pin assignment forthe wires of a BBU alarm cable, see 7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.

NOTE

The SLPU used as an alarm signal surge protection unit is configured with two USLP2s by default beforedelivery. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot, andthe USLP2 in slot 2 of the SLPU is not used.

Using the EMUA to Collect Customized AlarmsEach EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. When the DBS3900requires more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs, the EMUA can be used to collect customized alarmsin the following ways:

Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the power monitoring unit(PMU). Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the central monitoring unit type A (CMUA),CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For detailsabout cable connections, see Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34 Using the EMUA to collect customized alarms (1)

SENSOR

RS-485



346

Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMUreports the alarms to the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the remoteradio unit (RRU) through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-35.


COM_IN

ALM

COM_IN

RS-485

COM_OUT

COM_OUT

PMU

RRU

CMUA

EMUA

SENSOR

When the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A, customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA thatconnects to the cabinet control unit (CCU). Then, the CCU transfers the alarms to the BBUthrough the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-36.


For the position of the alarm input port on the EMUA and cable connections between the EMUAand sensors, see the EMUA User Guide.



347

7 DBS3900 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in variousscenarios.

NOTE

l For the cables in DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) ProductDescription, TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual, and IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual.

l For the RRU cables, see the installation guide for the corresponding type of RRU.

7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as wellas the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input powerand combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.

7.2 BBU3900 CablesThis section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900cables.

DBS3900Hardware Description 7 DBS3900 Cables


348

7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as wellas the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input powerand combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.

7.1.1 Power Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), whichconverts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into –48 V DC power to provides power to customerequipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advancedpower module with a heat-exchanger cooler.

NOTE

The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is configured withone APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). TheAPM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DCpower and provides power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC. Figure 7-1 shows the power cableconnections.



349

Figure 7-1 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Table 7-1 lists the power cables.

Table 7-1 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Cable No. Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet

P2 and P5 Power cables for the fan assembly

P3 7.2.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet

P6 Power Cable for the Batteries

P7 Input Power Cable of the Heater

P8 Input Power Cable of the Heating Film

P9 RRU power cable

Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, whichconverts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU,RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A).



350

Figure 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC

Table 7-2 lists the power cable connections.

Table 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC


P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30H PowerCabinet



P4 Input Power Cable of the TMC11H

P6 Power Cable for the Batteries

P7 Input power cable for the heater in the batterycabinet

P8 Input power cables for the heating film in thebattery cabinet

P9 RRU power cable

When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T,the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power



351

into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure7-3 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T


Table 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T


P1 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P2 and P5 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H


P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P6 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

P7 TEC input power cable

P8 RRU power cable



352

Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the input power is –48 V DC, a distributed base station uses two TMCs. The TMCs areconfigured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), which provide power tothe BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 7-4 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs


Table 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs



P2 Power cables for the fan assembly


P4 RRU power cable

When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) providepower to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-5 shows the power cableconnections.

Figure 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)



353


Table 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)



P2 Power cables for the fan assembly


P4 RRU power cable

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei providesa series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C).The power equipment converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and providespower to customer equipment.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with an EPS, whichconverts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for theBBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.B). Figure 7-6 shows the power cable connections.



354

Figure 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D


Table 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D


P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box




P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D


P7 RRU power cable


P9 Power Cable for the Heating Film in theIBBS200D



355

When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with an EPU, whichconverts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for theBBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 7-7 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 7-7 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D


Table 7-7 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D


P1 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in theAPM30H

P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 and P4 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D


P6 RRU power cable





356


P9 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D


P11 Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in theTMC11H

Figure 7-8 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T.

Figure 7-8 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T


Table 7-8 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T







357



P5 Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T


P7 RRU power cable


Figure 7-9 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T.

Figure 7-9 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T




358

Table 7-9 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T



P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 Power Cable for the AC Heater


P5 RRU power cable


P7 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

P8 Power Cables for the TEC



Figure 7-10 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.

Figure 7-10 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds



359


Table 7-10 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds





P5 and P13 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D


P8 RRU power cable

P9 Power cable for the heating film


P4 and P14 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

Figure 7-11 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.



360

Figure 7-11 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds


Table 7-11 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds



P2 and P4 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 Power Cable for the Heating Film


P6 RRU power cable


P9 and P13 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D





361


P8 and P12 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

Figure 7-12 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts.

Figure 7-12 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts


Table 7-12 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts





P5 and P12 Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T




362


P8 RRU power cable



Figure 7-13 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts.

Figure 7-13 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts


Table 7-13 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts



P2 and P3 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box




363


P5 RRU power cable


P8 and P11 Power Cables for the TEC



P7 and P12 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

If the DBS3900 serves as a triple-mode base station, it needs to be configured with two BBUs:BBU0 and BBU1. The power cable connections in the cabinet housing BBU0 are the same asthose in the cabinet housing BBU1. Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15 show the power cableconnections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) asan example.

Figure 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds




364

Table 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds






P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D


P7 RRU power cable



Figure 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds

P8P8

P9P9P9P9P10P10

P12P12

P13P13P14P14

P11P11

P7P7

P6P6

P4P4P5P5

P1P1

P2P2

P3P3

P8P8

P9P9

P10P10

P13P13P14P14

P7P7

P6P6

P4P4P5P5

P1P1

P2P2

P3P3BBU0 BBU1


Table 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds





365


P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H


P5 and P13 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D


P8 RRU power cable




Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, theDCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.B) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmissionequipment. Figure 7-16 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station


Table 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station



P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H




366


P4 RRU power cable

When two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, theDCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.C) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmissionequipment. Figure 7-17 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station


Table 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station





P4 RRU power cable

Power Cable Connections in the +24 V DC Power Supply ScenarioIf a single- or dual-mode base station uses an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V), the DC/DC powerequipment in the APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) converts the +24 V DC power into -48 V DC powerand forwards the power to the DCDU-03B, which then distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs,and other components in the cabinet. Figure 7-18 shows the power cable connections.



367

Figure 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a single-or dual-mode base station


Table 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a single- ordual-mode base station


P1 Input power cable for the DC/DC powerequipment

P2 Input power cable for the DCDU-03B


P4 RRU power cable

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)

To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei providesa series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.D). The power equipmentconverts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to customerequipment.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioNOTE

When the BBU of a DBS3900 is configured in the APM30H (Ver.D) and the APM30H (Ver.D) isconfigured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU to provide powerfor the RRUs. This section describes single- or dual-mode base stations configured with twelve RRUs asexamples.

When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-19 shows the power cable connections inthis scenario.



368

Figure 7-19 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)


Table 7-19 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)


P1 and P11 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box

P2 and P8 Power Cables for a Fan Assembly


P4 Power Cables in a Battery Cabinet

P5 TEC Power Cables

P6 Input Power Cable for the APM30H

P7 RRU power cable

P9 Input Power Cable for a TMC11H

P10 Power Cable for a Heating Film

P12 DCDU-12B Input Power Cable

When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the BBU, RRUs,



369

TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D). Figure 7-20 shows the power cable connections inthis scenario.

Figure 7-20 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)


Table 7-20 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)






P5 TEC Power Cables


P7 RRU power cable



When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 TMC11H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts



370

110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-21 shows the power cable connections inthis scenario.

Figure 7-21 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+2 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)


Table 7-21 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+2 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)





P4 and P13 Power Cables in a Battery Cabinet

P5 and P14 Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D


P7 RRU power cable






371

The following figure shows the power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with of 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T.

NOTE

This section uses describes the power cable connections in the IBBS700D. The power cable connectionsin the IBBS700T are the same as those in the IBBS700D.

Figure 7-22 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D

The following table describes the power cables.

Table 7-22 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D

No. Description

P1, P10, and P11 Power Cables for an AC Junction Box

P2 and P8 FAN 02D Power Cables


P4 Power Cable for a Power Distribution Box

P5 Power Cables for the Temperature ControlSystem

P6 EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Power Cables



372

No. Description

P7 RRU power cable

P9 DCDU-12C Power Cable

P12 DCDU-12B Power Cable

When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, whichconverts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for theBBU, RRUs, TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200Ts (Ver.D). Figure 7-23 shows the power cableconnections in this scenario.

Figure 7-23 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)


Table 7-23 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)







373



P5 and P14 TEC Power Cables


P7 RRU power cable



Figure 7-24 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200D (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D),BBU +1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same asthose in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure7-24.

Figure 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D(Ver.D)




374

Table 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D(Ver.D)






P5 Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D


P7 RRU power cable




Figure 7-25 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200T (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D),BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same asthose in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure7-25.



375

Figure 7-25 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with +1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T(Ver.D)


Table 7-25 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T(Ver.D)






P5 TEC Power Cables


P7 RRU power cable





376

Figure 7-26 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D),BBU +2 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same asthose in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D), as shown by 1 inFigure 7-26.

Figure 7-26 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds(Ver.D)


Table 7-26 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds(Ver.D)






P5 and P14 Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D


P7 RRU power cable




377




Figure 7-27 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D),BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same asthose in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure7-27.

Figure 7-27 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts(Ver.D)


Table 7-27 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts(Ver.D)







378



P5 and P14 TEC Power Cables


P7 RRU power cable



Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When one TMC11H (Ver.D) is configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, theDCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) provides power for the BBU, RRUs, or transmissionequipment. Figure 7-28 lists the power cable connections.

Figure 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station


Table 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station




P3 Power Cables for a Fan Assembly

P4 RRU power cable



379

Figure 7-29 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured withone or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space belowBBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as those in a base station configured with oneTMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure 7-29.

Figure 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or twoTMC11Hs (Ver.D)


Table 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or twoTMC11Hs (Ver.D)




P3 Power Cables for a Fan Assembly

P4 RRU power cable

Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

To use the 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power, the DBS3900 installed outdoors can beconfigured with OMB or OMB (Ver.C). The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) can be configured with anAC/DC power equipment or an embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) toconvert the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power, which is supplied to thecomponents in the OMB or OMB (Ver.C).

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-30 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB configured for the DBS3900.



380

Figure 7-30 Power cable connections for the AC OMB

Table 7-30 describes the power cable connections.

Table 7-30 Power cable connections for the AC OMB


P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan

P2 HEUA power cable


P4 Input power cable for the direct currentdistribution unit (DCDU)

P5 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan

P6 Input power cable for the AC/DC powerequipment

P7 AC input power cable for the OMB

P8 RRU power cable

Figure 7-31 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C) configured for theDBS3900.



381

Figure 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)


Table 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)


P1 HEUB Power Cable


P3 ETP48100-A1 Power Cable

P4 PDU10D-01 Power Cable

P5 RRU power cable

P6 AC Input Power Cable

Power Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 7-32 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB configured for the DBS3900.



382

Figure 7-32 Power cable connections for the DC OMB


Table 7-32 Power cable connections for the DC OMB


P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan

P2 HEUA power cable

P3 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan


P5 DC input power cable for the OMB

P6 RRU power cable

Figure 7-33 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C) configured for theDBS3900.



383

Figure 7-33 Power Cable Connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)


Table 7-33 Power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)


P1 HEUB Power Cable


P3 RRU power cable

P4 DC Input Power Cable

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A

The TP48600A cabinet can be configured with the PDU05A-3 and ETP to use the 110 V AC or220 V AC power supply. The PDU05A-3 distributes AC power and the ETP distributes DCpower to components in the cabinet.

Figure 7-34 shows the power cable connections in the following scenario: The DBS3900 isconfigured with 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H (Ver.C), and two BBUs areinstalled in the TP48600A that uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. The power cableconnections for an IBBS700T and the power cable connections for an IBBS700D are the same.Therefore, this section describes only the power cable connections for an IBBS700D.



384

NOTE

If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A, two BBU power cables are required.

Figure 7-34 Power cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


Table 7-34 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 TP48600A+1IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


P1 AC input power cable

P2 to P5 7.2.3 BBU Power Cable


P7 Power Cable for the Temperature ControlSystem in a Battery Cabinet

P8 Input power cable for storage batteries

P9 Input power cable for a junction box

P10 to P21 RRU power cable

7.1.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the transmission cable connections in the indoor and outdoor DBS3900base stations in different modes.



385

Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base StationIn GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or opticalcable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration Principlesl In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.l The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the

surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.l The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the

surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.l The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected

to the SLPU.

Application ScenarioTable 7-35 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station indifferent modes.

Table 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported

Application Scenario Legend

Transmission overthe E1Cable

GSMonly

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMUand UTRP.

"1" in theFigure 7-35shows the cableconnections inscenario 1.

UMTSonly

Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT.


LTEonly

The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.

"3" in Figure7-35 shows thecableconnections.



386

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


Transmission overthe FECable

GSMonly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the GTMU.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the GTMU.


UMTSonly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the UTRP2.Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the UTRP9.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.


LTEonly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.


Figure 7-35 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.



387

Figure 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable

T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base StationIn GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or opticalcable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration principlesl In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.

Application ScenarioTable 7-36 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station indifferent transmission modes.



388

Table 7-36 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


Transmission overthe E1Cable

GSMOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMUand UTRP.


UMTSOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT.


LTEOnly

The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.

"3" in theFigure 7-36shows the cableconnections.

Transmission overthe FECable

GSMOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the GTMU.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the GTMU.


UMTSOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the UTRP2.Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the UTRP9.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.




389

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


LTEOnly

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.



Figure 7-36 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber OpticCable

-

Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. Thissection describes transmission cable connections for each mode.



390

Configuration Principlesl In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.l In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.l In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or

UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.l In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT

or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.l The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the

surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.l The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the

surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.l The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected

to the SLPU.

Application ScenarioTable 7-37 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in differenttransmission modes.

Table 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in commontransmission mode

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


TDMCommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.


IPOverE1/T1CommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical portor optical port.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. TheWMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU usingthe electrical port or optical port.




391

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


GSM+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using theelectrical port or optical port.

"3" in Figure7-37 shows thecableconnections.

UMTS+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPTusing the electrical port or optical port.


IP overFE/GECommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected tothe UTRP using the optical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. TheWMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMUthrough the backplane.




392

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through thebackplane.


UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theelectrical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPTthrough the backplane.


RouteBackupModewith IPCommonTrans

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the optical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the electrical port.




393

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


mission

GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the optical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the electrical port.


UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.


HybridTransmission

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theLMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theelectrical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theLMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theelectrical port.





394

Figure 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in commontransmission mode

T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 SurgeProtection Transfer Cable

T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.8 InterconnectionCable Between the FEElectrical Ports

T4: 7.2.10 FE/GEFiber Optic Cable

T5: 7.2.9 InterconnectionCable Between FE OpticalPorts

T6: 7.2.7 FE SurgeProtection TransferCable

T7: FE/GE Ethernet Cable -

Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. Thissection describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration Principlesl In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.



395

l In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables areconnected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.

l In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT orUMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.

l In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPTor UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.


Table 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in commontransmission mode

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


TDMCommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.


IPOverE1/T1CommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical portor optical port.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmissioncable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. TheWMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU usingthe electrical port or optical port.


GSM+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using theelectrical port or optical port.


UMTS+LTE

The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable isconnected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPTusing the electrical port or optical port.




396

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


IP overFE/GECommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected tothe UTRP using the optical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. TheWMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMUthrough the backplane.


GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through thebackplane.




397

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport or electrical port on the UTRPc.Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theelectrical port.Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electricalport or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPTor UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPTthrough the backplane.


RouteBackupModewith IPCommonTransmission

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the optical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the electrical port.


GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the optical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU using the electrical port.Scenario 3: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to theGTMU through the backplane.




398

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT isinterconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using theoptical port.


HybridTransmission

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT orUMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT usingthe electrical port.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT orUMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT usingthe optical port.





399

Figure 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in commontransmission mode

T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T2: 7.2.8 Interconnection CableBetween the FE Electrical Ports

T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE FiberOptic Cable

T4: 7.2.9 Interconnection CableBetween FE Optical Ports




400

Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station inSeparate Transmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. Thissection describes transmission cable connections for each mode.

Configuration Principlesl The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the

surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.

l The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After thesurge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.

l The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connectedto the SLPU.


Table 7-39 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in differenttransmission modes.

Table 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independenttransmission mode

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


GSME1/T1+UMTS E1/T1

GSM+UMTS

The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.


GSMFE/GE+UMTS FE/GE

GSM+UMTS

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.


GSME1/T1+LTEFE/GE

GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on theLMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side.The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electricalor optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.




401

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


UMTSFE/GE+LTEFE/GE

GSM+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FEelectrical port on the GTMU.


UMTSE1/T1+LTEFE/GE

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTSside. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT.


UMTSFE/GE+LTEFE/GE

UMTS+LTE

Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FEelectrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.





402

Figure 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independenttransmission mode

T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 SurgeProtection Transfer Cable

T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE FiberOptic Cable

T4: 7.2.7 FE SurgeProtection Transfer Cable

T5: FE/GE Ethernet Cable - - -

Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in SeparateTransmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. Thissection describes transmission cable connections for each mode.




403

Table 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-commontransmission mode

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


GSME1/T1+UMTS E1/T1

GU The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.


GSMFE/GE+UMTS FE/GE

GU Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.


GSME1/T1+LTEFE/GE

GL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port onthe GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on theLMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side.The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electricalor optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.


UMTSFE/GE+LTEFE/GE

GL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and theGTMU.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FEelectrical port on the GTMU.


UMTSE1/T1+LTEFE/GE

UL Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. Thetransmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port onthe WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electricalport on the LMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTSside. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or opticalport on the LMPT or UMPT.




404

TransmissionMode

ModeSupported


UMTSFE/GE+LTEFE/GE

UL Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and theWMPT or UMPT.Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected tothe FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FEelectrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.



Figure 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-commontransmission mode

T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable


Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base StationThis section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.



405

In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,

and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,

and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL

+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, whilethe UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

Table 7-41 lists the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Table 7-41 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

Triple Mode Mode Specification Reference

GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1)(BBUs not cascaded)

BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU1works in LTE only mode.

l In dual mode, commonand independenttransmission aresupported. For details, seethe Transmission CableConnections for a Dual-Mode Base Station inCommon TransmissionMode and theTransmission CableConnections for a Dual-Mode Base Station inIndependentTransmission Mode.

l For details about thetransmission cableconnections for a single-mode base station, see theTransmission CableConnections for a Single-Mode Base Station.

GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1)(BBUs not cascaded)

BBU0 works in GSM+LTEmode and BBU1 works inUMTS only mode.

UO (BBU0) + GL (BBU1)(BBUs not cascaded)

BBU0 works in UMTS onlymode and BBU1 works inGSM+LTE mode.

GO (BBU0) + UL (BBU1)(BBUs not cascaded)

BBU0 works in GSM onlymode and BBU1 works inUMTS+LTE mode.

GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1)(BBUs cascaded)

BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU1works in LTE only mode.

For details, see the "1" or the"2" in the Figure 7-41.

GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1)(BBUs cascaded)

BBU0 works in GSM+LTEmode and BBU1 works inUMTS only mode.

For details, see the "3" or the"4" in the Figure 7-41.

GU (BBU0) + UL (BBU1)(BBUs cascaded)

BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU1works in UMTS+LTE mode.

For details, see the "5" in theFigure 7-41.

Figure 7-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.



406

Figure 7-41 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

T1: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.

l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.

l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.

l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, whilethe UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.


Table 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.

Table 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU 1works in LTE only mode.

l Dual-mode includescommon and non-common transmission.



407

Triple-Mode Scenario Mode Specification Reference

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

For details, see theTransmission CableConnections for a Dual-Mode Base Station inCommon TransmissionMode and theTransmission CableConnections for a Dual-Mode Base Station inNon-CommonTransmission Mode.

l For details about thetransmission cableconnections for a single-mode base station, see theTransmission CableConnections for a Single-Mode Base Station.

BBU 0 works in GSM+LTEmode and BBU 1 works inUMTS only mode.

UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in UMTS onlymode and BBU 1 works inGSM+LTE mode.

GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)(BBU Not Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM onlymode and BBU 1 works inUMTS+LTE mode.

GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU 1works in LTE only mode.

For details, see the "1" or"2" in the Figure 7-42

GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+LTEmode and BBU 1 works inUMTS only mode.

For details, see the "3" or"4" in the Figure 7-42

GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)(BBU Cascaded)

BBU 0 works in GSM+UMTS mode and BBU 1works in UMTS+LTE mode.

For details, see the "5" in theFigure 7-42

Figure 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.



408

Figure 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station

T1:7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

7.1.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsCPRI cable connections for the DBS3900 depend on the DBS3900 working mode.

NOTE

l Of all RRUs working in GSM mode, the RRU3008 or RRU3004 is used as an example to describe theCPRI cable connections.

l Of all RRUs working in UMTS mode, the RRU3804 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cableconnections.

l Of all RRUs working in LTE mode, the RRU3201 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cableconnections.

l Of all RRUs working in multiple modes, the RRU3908 is used as an example to describe the CPRIcable connections.

CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections canbe used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

Figure 7-43 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, six RRUs support three sectors, and a pair of two RRUsworking in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.



409

Figure 7-43 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 7-44 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, nine RRUs support three sectors, and a group of threeRRUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.


CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number ofsectors and frequency bands. UMTS is short for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,and CPRI is short for common public radio interface.

Figure 7-45 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The baseband unit(BBU) is configured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and do not supportMIMO, and the base station supports three sectors. MIMO is short for multiple-input multiple-output.



410


Figure 7-46 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO orsupports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and twoRRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.


Figure 7-47 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the WBBPd, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO orsupports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and twoRRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.



411


CPRI Cable Connections in the LO Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number ofsectors and frequency bands. LTE is short for Long Term Evolution, and CPRI is short forcommon public radio interface.

NOTE

CPRI cables are connected to CPRI ports on the LBBP sequentially from the CPRI0 port.

Figure 7-48 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPc, each RRU works in a single band andsupports 2T2R MIMO, and the base station uses 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth and supportsthree sectors. BBU is short for baseband unit, RRU is short for remote radio unit, and MIMO isshort for multiple-input multiple-output.


Figure 7-49 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the LBBPd2 or LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R



412

MIMO, each pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 10 MHz bandwidth andsupports three sectors.


Figure 7-50 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU isconfigured with the LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R MIMO, eachpair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 20 MHz bandwidth and supports threesectors.


CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cableconnections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

Figure 7-51 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band modeand three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology support three sectors.



413


Figure 7-52 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s workin single-band mode, the RRU3804s working in star topology and each supports a sector; theRRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star andchain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in thesame sector with different bands are cascaded.


Figure 7-53 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s workin dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s workingin the same sector with different bands are cascaded; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to asector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bandsare cascaded.



414


Figure 7-54 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3908s workin single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors;the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s workingin star topology correspond to three sectors.


CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

Figure 7-55 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s workin single-band mode and support 2T2R MIMO, three RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the



415

star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s serving the same sectorwith different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.


Figure 7-56 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s workin dual-band mode, use 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO, all theRRU3201s serve three sectors and use the star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode,two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chaintopology.


Figure 7-57 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s workin single-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support4T4R MIMO, and the RRU3201s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology;the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, and two RRU3008s serving the same sector withdifferent bands are connected in the star and chain topology.




416

Figure 7-58 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3908s workin single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRU3908s serving the samesector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3008s work in single-band mode, threeRRU3008s serve three sectors and use the star topology.


CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS+LTE Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS+LTE mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the numberof sectors and frequency bands supported by the DBS3900. LTE is short for Long TermEvolution, and CPRI is short for common public radio interface.

As shown in Figure 7-59, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors,support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in startopology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors, are connected tothe BBU by CPRI cables in star topology, but do not support the 2T2R MIMO technology.




417

As shown in Figure 7-60, the RRU3201s work in dual frequency bands, serve three sectors witha bandwidth of 20 MHz or 15 MHz, support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected tothe BBU by CPRI cables in star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band andare connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in star-chain topology, and two RRU3804s servingthe same sector are cascaded.


As shown in Figure 7-61, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectorswith a bandwidth of 10 MHz, support the 4T4R MIMO technology; two RRU3201s serving thesame sector are connected to the BBU in dual-star topology; the RRU3804s work in a singlefrequency band and serve three sectors, and are connected to the BBU in star-chain topology,with two RRU3804s serving the same sector cascaded.


Figure 7-62 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRUs use theCPRI MUX topology, the UMTS mode is configured with the WBBPf, the LTE mode isconfigured with the LBBPd, the RRU3929s (1700 MHz) are used as multi-mode RRUs, and allCPRI cables are connected to the WBBPf; the LBBPd is not connected to any RRUs.



418

Figure 7-62 CPRI cable connections in CPRI MUX topology

CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base StationStarting from SingleRAN7.0, Huawei triple-mode base stations support six typical scenarios:GU+L (BBUs not interconnected), GL+U (BBUs not interconnected), U+GL (BBUs notinterconnected), GU+L (UCIU+UMPT), GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).

A single BBU can support a maximum of two modes. Therefore, two BBUs are required for atriple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 forbetter understanding.l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,

and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,

and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.l The difference between the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and U+GL (BBUs

not interconnected) scenario is as follows: The GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenarioapplies to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the U+GL (BBUsnot interconnected) scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

l The difference between the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario is as follows: In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, a BBUin GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in the same base station but not interconnected.In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, a BBU in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are inthe same base station are interconnected through the UCIU.

GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)In the GU+L scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRI Cable Connections in theGSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

In the GU+L scenario, BBU1 works in LTE only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the LOBase Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)In the GL+U scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the GLBase Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.



419

In the GL+U scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in theUMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

U+GL (BBUs not Interconnected)In the U+GL scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in theUMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.

In this scenario, CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station describes the CPRI cableconnections for BBU1 working in GSM+LTE mode.

GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, BBU0 and BBU1 are interconnected by the UCIU andUMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. Figure 7-63 shows the CPRI cableconnections in this scenario.

Figure 7-63 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario

7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.

Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 VAC/220 V AC and –48 V DC power supply scenarios.



420

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power SupplyScenario

NOTE

The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.

Figure 7-64 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 configured with1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario.

Figure 7-64 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC

Table 7-43 lists the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 7-43 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC


S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

S4 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor



421


S6 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries

S7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30Transmission Cabinet

Figure 7-65 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC.

Figure 7-65 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC


Table 7-44 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC


S1 Environment monitoring signal cable


S3, S7 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable



422




Figure 7-66 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T.

Figure 7-66 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T


Table 7-45 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T




S3, S7 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable



423


S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable


Figure 7-67 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 2APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs.

Figure 7-67 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs


Table 7-46 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs




S3, S7, and S8 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable



424




Figure 7-68 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 2APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts.

Figure 7-68 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts


Table 7-47 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts




S3, S7, and S8 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable




425

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-69 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured withtwo TMCs in the –48 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs


Table 7-48 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs


S1 and S2 7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

Figure 7-70 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).

Figure 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver.A)




426

Table 7-49 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs(Ver.A)


S1 and S2 7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C) Cabinet

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 VAC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.


Figure 7-71 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 that serves as asingle- or dual-mode base station and is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H(Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Figure 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Table 7-50 lists the monitoring signal cables.



427

Table 7-50 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configurationof 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T



S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Betweenthe CMUA and the BBU

Figure 7-72 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Figure 7-72 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T




428

Table 7-51 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configurationof 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T




S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUEand the BBU

Figure 7-73 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of one APM30H (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Figure 7-73 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in theconfiguration of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Table 7-52 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configurationof +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts






429



S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs

Figure 7-74 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Figure 7-74 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in theconfiguration of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Table 7-53 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configurationof +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts






430




Figure 7-75 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of two APM30Hs (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+four IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Figure 7-75 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in theconfiguration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

S2S2 S3S3S1S1

S1S1

S5S5

S4S4S6S6

S2S2 S6S6S1S1

S1S1

S4S4S6S6


Table 7-54 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configurationof 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts






Figure 7-76 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.



431

Figure 7-76 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in theconfiguration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Table 7-55 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configurationof 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts






A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is configuredin the basic cabinet, and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. The monitoring devicesin all cabinets are connected to BBU0. Figure 7-77 shows the monitoring signal cableconnections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) asan example.



432

Figure 7-77 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station in theconfiguration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


Table 7-56 Monitoring signal cables in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts






Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 7-78 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 serves as asingle- or dual-mode base station and the BBUs are installed in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B).

Figure 7-78 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver. B)



433


Table 7-57 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station



Figure 7-79 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBUs of the DBS3900are configured in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C).

Figure 7-79 Monitoring signal cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for asingle- or dual-mode base station


Table 7-58 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dual-mode base station



Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)The monitoring signal cable connections are different for distributed base stations in the 110 VAC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.



434


Figure 7-80 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).

Figure 7-80 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)


Table 7-59 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)


S1 and S4 PMU-CMUEA Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S3 7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

Figure 7-81 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D).



435

Figure 7-81 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)


Table 7-60 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)




Figure 7-82 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).



436

Figure 7-82 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)


Table 7-61 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)




S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUEAs

Figure 7-83 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).



437

Figure 7-83 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)


Table 7-62 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)




S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUEAs

The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configuredwith 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D.



438

Figure 7-84 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D

No. Description

S1 and S4 PMU 11A-CMUEA Monitoring SignalCable

S2 and S3 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configuredwith 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T.



439

Figure 7-85 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T

No. Description

S1 PMU 11A-CMUEA Monitoring SignalCable

S4 PMU-CCU Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S3 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

In a triple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this basestation is not configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space belowBBU 0 in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base station is configured with a TMC11H(Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D). Figure 7-86 shows the monitoring signalcable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).



440

Figure 7-86 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200D (Ver.D)


Table 7-63 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200D (Ver.D)




Figure 7-87 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200T (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the basestation is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), asshown by 2 in Figure 7-87.



441

Figure 7-87 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200T (Ver.D)


Table 7-64 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1IBBS200T (Ver.D)




Figure 7-88 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configuredwith 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the basestation is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), asshown by 2 in Figure 7-87.



442

Figure 7-88 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)


Table 7-65 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)






443

Figure 7-89 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configuredwith 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the basestation is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), asshown by 2 in Figure 7-87.

Figure 7-89 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)




444

Table 7-66 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)




Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-90 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with one TMC11H (Ver.D).

Figure 7-90 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with one TMC11H (Ver.D)


Table 7-67 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with one TMC11H (Ver.D)


S1 7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

Figure 7-91 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base stationconfigured with one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).

NOTE

When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D) and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U spacebelow BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base station is the same as those in the samebase station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 2 in Figure 7-81.



445

Figure 7-91 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured withone or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)


Table 7-68 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured withtwo TMC11Hs (Ver.D)



Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, orIFS06

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base stations in 110 VAC/220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenario.

NOTE

l For details about the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBU is installed in the IMB03 orIMB03+IFS06, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.

l When the DBS3900 uses the OMB or IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a single- or dual-mode base station. When the DBS3900 uses the IMB03+IFS06, the DBS3900 can be configured as asingle-, dual-, or triple-mode base station.


Figure 7-92 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith an AC OMB.



446

Figure 7-92 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB

S1S1

S1

S2S2

S2S2

S2S2

S2S2

S3S3

S3S3

S5S5S5

S4S4

S4S4


Table 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB


S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC SurgeProtection Box

S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DCPower Equipment

Figure 7-93 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith an AC OMB (Ver.C).



447

Figure 7-93 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)


Table 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)


S1 ELU Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring signal cable for the outer aircirculation fan

S3 Monitoring signal cable for the inner aircirculation fan


S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the SurgeProtection Box

S6 7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

S7 PMU 11A Monitoring Signal Cable

S8 Temperature monitoring signal cable



448

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 7-94 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith a DC OMB.

Figure 7-94 DC OMB monitoring signal cable connections


Table 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB



S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA

Figure 7-95 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith a DC OMB (Ver.C).



449

Figure 7-95 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)


Table 7-72 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)


S1 ELU Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FanAssembly

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FanAssembly


S5 7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring SignalCable

S6 Temperature monitoring signal cable

Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A CabinetThis section describes the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 uses theTP48600A cabinet.



450

When the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H (Ver.C), two BBUs are installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 7-96 shows themonitoring signal cable connections in this scenario. The monitoring signal cable connectionsin the scenario with one IBBS700T are the same as those for the scenario with one IBBS700D.This section describes only the monitoring signal cable connections for the scenario with oneIBBS700D.

NOTE

If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A cabinet, only one CCU-BBU signal cable is required.

Figure 7-96 Monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

Table 7-73 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 7-73 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


S1 and S2 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCUand the BBU

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H

S4 Inter-CCU Signal Cable

7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable ConnectionsTwo BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supportingcapability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the serviceprocessing capability of a single mode.



451

NOTE

When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.

UCIU+UMPTIn a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 toachieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connectedto the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 toM4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shownin Figure 7-97.

NOTE

In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-74lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.

Table 7-74 BBU configurations

Scenario Description BBU0 BBU1

Triple-Mode Scenario GU L

GL U

GU UL

Single-Mode Scenario U U

Figure 7-97 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT

WBBPf+WBBPfIn the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit basebanddata. As shown in Figure 7-97, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.

NOTE

In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.



452

Figure 7-98 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs

7.2 BBU3900 CablesThis section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900cables.

7.2.1 List of BBU3900 CablesThe BBU3900 cables consist of the PGND cables, BBU power cables, E1/T1 cables, E1/T1surge protection transfer cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE surge protection transfer cables,interconnection cables between FE electrical ports and between FE optical ports, CPRI fiberoptic cables, APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable, HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable,CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, monitoring signal cables for the EMUA, monitoringsignal cables for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarmsignal cable, GPS clock signal cable, BBU cascading signal cable, co-site signal cable, andmaintenance adapter cable.

Table 7-75 lists the BBU3900 cables.

Table 7-75 Cable list

Cable One End The Other End

Connector InstallationPosition


7.2.2 PGND Cable OT terminal(M4, 6 mm2 or0.009 in.2)

Groundterminal onthe BBU

OT terminal(M8, 6 mm2 or0.009 in.2)

Externalground bar

7.2.3 BBU PowerCable

3V3 connector PWR port onthe UPEU inthe BBU


LOAD6 wiringterminal on theDCDU

3V3 connector PWR port onthe UPEU inthe BBU

Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)

EPS/LOAD1



453




7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable DB26 maleconnector

E1/T1 port onthe UELP inthe SLPU, orE1/T1 port onthe UMPT,GTMU,WMPT, orUTRP in theBBU

Made onsiteaccording torequirements

Externaltransmissionequipment

7.2.5 E1/T1 SurgeProtection TransferCable

DB26 maleconnector

E1/T1 port onthe UMPT,GTMU,WMPT, orUTRP in theBBU

DB25connector

INSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU

FE/GE EthernetCable

RJ45 connector FE0 port in theOUTSIDEpart of theUFLP in theSLPUFE0 port onthe UMPT,GTMU orWMPT in theBBUFE/GE port onthe UTRP inthe BBUFE/GE port onthe LMPT inthe BBU

RJ45connector


7.2.7 FE SurgeProtection TransferCable

RJ45 connector FE0 port onthe UMPT,GTMU orWMPT in theBBUFE/GE port onthe UTRP inthe BBU

RJ45connector

FE0 port in theINSIDE part ofthe UFLP in theSLPU



454




7.2.8InterconnectionCable Between theFE Electrical Ports

RJ45 connector FE0 port onthe WMPT inthe BBU

RJ45connector

FE0 port on theGTMU in theBBU

7.2.9InterconnectionCable Between FEOptical Ports

LC connector FE1 port onthe WMPT inthe BBU

LC connector FE1 port on theGTMU in theBBU

7.2.10 FE/GE FiberOptic Cable

LC connector FE1 port onthe WMPT orGTMU in theBBU

FC, SC, or LCconnector


7.2.11 CPRI FiberOptic Cable

DLC connector CPRI port onthe GTMU orWBBP in theBBU

DLCconnector

CPRI_W porton the RRU

7.2.12 APMI-BBUMonitoring SignalCable

RJ45 connector MON1 port onthe UPEU orUEIU in theBBU

Twisted pair TX+, TX-, RX+, or RX- porton the APMI

7.2.14 HEUA-BBUMonitoring SignalCable

RJ45 connector MON port onthe UPEU orUEIU in theBBU

RJ45connector

COM_IN porton the HEUA

7.2.15 MonitoringSignal CableBetween the CMUAand the BBU

RJ45 connector MON1 port onthe UPEU orUEIU in theBBU

RJ45connector

CMUA/COM_IN

7.2.17 MonitoringSignal Cable for theEMUA

RJ45 connector MON1 port onthe UPEU inthe BBU

DB9 maleconnector

RS485 port onthe EMUA

7.2.18 MonitoringSignal Cable for thePSU (DC/DC)

RJ45 connector EXT_ALM0port on theUPEU orUEIU in theBBU

Cord endterminal

ALM wiringterminal on thePSU (DC/DC)



455




7.2.19 In-PositionSignal Cable for thePSU (DC/DC)

RJ45 connector EXT_ALM1port on theUPEU orUEIU in theBBU

RJ45connector

PRESENT porton the PSU(DC/DC)

7.2.20 BBU AlarmCable

RJ45 connector EXT_ALMport on theUPEU orUEIU in theBBU

RJ45connector

External alarmdevice

7.2.21 GPS ClockSignal Cable

SMA maleconnector

GPS port onthe LMPT orUSCU in theBBU

N-type femaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector

7.2.22 BBUinterconnectionsignal cable

DLC connector M0 to M4ports on theUCIU in theBBU

DLCconnector

CI port on theUMPT in theBBU

7.2.23 CableBetween twoCombined BaseStations

DB15 maleconnector

GCK port onthe UCIU inthe BBU

MD36 orDB15 maleconnector

DGLUb on theDCTB in theBTS3012

7.2.24 AdapterUsed for LocalMaintenance

USB connector USB port onthe UMPT inthe BBU

Ethernetconnector

Ethernet cable

7.2.2 PGND CableA PGND cable ensures proper grounding of a BBU.

Exterior

A PGND cable is green and yellow and has a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.²). Bothends of the cable are OT terminals. If the customer prepares the PGND cable, a copper-corecable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.2) is recommended.

Figure 7-99 shows a PGND cable.



456

Figure 7-99 PGND cable for the BBU

(1) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²) (1) OT terminal (M8, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.²)

7.2.3 BBU Power CableBBU power cable feeds power from the power equipment into the BBU. The maximum lengthof the BBU power cable is 20 m.

Cable TypeTable 7-76 lists the mapping relationships between the power device for the BBU and the typeof the BBU power cable.

Table 7-76 Type of the BBU power cable

Cable PowerDevices

Connector onthe PowerDevice Side

Connector onthe BBU Side

Exterior

BBU powercable

PDU andDCDU-03B


3V3 connector The exterior isshown by 1 inFigure 7-100.

EPSEPU03A-03 orEPU03A-05ETP48100-A1


The exterior isshown by 2 inFigure 7-100.

EPU05A-03 orEPU05A-05


The exterior isshown by 4 and6 in Figure7-100.



457

Cable PowerDevices

Connector onthe PowerDevice Side

Connector onthe BBU Side

Exterior

AC/DC powersystemsupplyingpower to a BBUinstalled in theOMB

H4 connector The BBU powercable has threeconnectors.Among the threeconnectors, two3V3 connectorsare connected tothe BBU andHEUA, and oneH4 connector isconnected to theAC/DC powersystem. An H4connector isshown by 5 nFigure 7-100.

AC/DC powersystemsupplyingpower to a BBUinstalled in theIMB03

H4 connector The exterior isshown by 3 nFigure 7-100.

ExteriorFigure 7-100 shows a BBU power cable.



458

Figure 7-100 BBU power cable

(1) 3V3 connector (2) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2 or0.009 in.2)

(3) Tool-less female connector(pressfit type)

(4) Tool-less female connector(pressfit type)

(5) H4 connector

Cable Description

A power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-77 describes the pin assignment for the wires ofa power cable.

Table 7-77 BBU power cable description

Pin at the BBUSide

Pin at the PowerEquipment Side

Wire Color inMost Regions

Wire Color inOther Regions(UK)

A1 -48 V Blue Gray

A2 - - -

A3 GND Black Black

7.2.4 E1/T1 CableAn E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).



459

Exterior

The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.

One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cableis prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-101 shows an E1/T1 cable.

Figure 7-101 E1/T1 signal cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 7-78 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.

Table 7-78 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables


75 ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector

L9 female connector

SMB female connector

BNC male connector

SMZ male connector

SMZ female connector

Pin Assignment

Table 7-79, Table 7-80, and Table 7-81 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1cable.

Table 7-79 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Pin on the DB26Male Connector

Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+



460


Type(1) Coaxial Unit No. Wire Label

X1.2 Ring RX1-

X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+

X1.4 Ring RX2-

X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+

X1.6 Ring RX3-

X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+

X1.8 Ring RX4-

X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+

X1.20 Ring TX1-

X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+

X1.22 Ring TX2-

X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+

X1.24 Ring TX3-

X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+

X1.26 Ring TX4-

NOTE

(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.

Table 7-80 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable


Wire Color Wire Type Wire Label

X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White RX1-

X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White RX2-

X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White RX3-

X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White RX4-



461



X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White TX1-

X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red TX2-

X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red TX3-

X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red TX4-

Table 7-81 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable



X.1 Blue and white Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White and blue RX1-

X.3 Orange and white Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White and orange RX2-

X.5 Green and white Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White and green RX3-

X.7 Brown and white Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White and brown RX4-

X.19 Gray and white Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White and gray TX1-

X.21 Blue and red Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red and blue TX2-

X.23 Orange and red Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red and orange TX3-

X.25 Green and red Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red and green TX4-



462

7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer CableThis section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to thetransmission board. This cable is optional. The length of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cableis 1.2 m (3.94 ft).

ExteriorThe E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-102.

Figure 7-102 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

(1) DB25 male connector (2) DB26 male connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-82 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfercable.

Table 7-82 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

Pin on the DB25 MaleConnector

Type Pin on the DB26 MaleConnector

X1.20 Twisted pair cable X2.2

X1.19 X2.3


X1.3 X2.5


X1.21 X2.7


X1.5 X2.9


X1.23 X2.11



463

Pin on the DB25 MaleConnector

Type Pin on the DB26 MaleConnector


X1.7 X2.13


X1.2 X2.15


X1.26 X2.25

7.2.6 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission equipment through routing equipment.It transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of the FE/GE cable is 50 m.

Exterior

The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable and has an RJ45 connector at each end, asshown in Figure 7-103.

Figure 7-103 FE/GE cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Cable Description

Table 7-83 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.

Table 7-83 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable

Pin on the RJ45Connector at OneEnd

Color Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector atthe Other End

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White andorange

X2.1



464

Pin on the RJ45Connector at OneEnd

Color Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector atthe Other End

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White andgreen

X2.3

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White and blue X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White andbrown

X2.7

7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer CableThe FE surge protection transfer cable is used to connect the UFLP and the main control board.It is an optional cable. The length of an FE surge protection transfer cable is 1 m (3.28 ft).

Exterior

The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure7-104.

Figure 7-104 FE surge protection transfer cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 7-84 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.

Table 7-84 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable

Pin on the RJ45Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector




465

Pin on the RJ45Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector

X1.1 White X2.1

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White X2.3


X1.5 White X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White X2.7

7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical PortsThis cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based co-transmission.

Exterior

The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,as shown in Figure 7-105.

Figure 7-105 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports

(1) RJ45 connector

7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical PortsThis cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmissionin IP mode.

Exterior

The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, asshown in Figure 7-106.



466

Figure 7-106 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic CableAn FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmissionequipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m(65.62 ft).

Exterior

The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-107, Figure 7-108, Figure 7-109.

Figure 7-107 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-108 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-109 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)



467

CAUTION

To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,adhere to the following rules:

l The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmissionequipment.

l The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmissionequipment.

7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic CableCPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiberoptic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.

Multimode fiber optic cables connect the BBU and RRU or interconnect two RRUs. Themaximum length of the multimode fiber optic cable between the BBU and RRU is 150 m (492.12ft) and the multimode fiber optic cable between two RRUs has a fixed length of 10 m (32.81 ft).

A single-mode fiber optic cable consists of the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiberoptic cable, and the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable areinterconnected using the ODF. The maximum length of the single-mode pigtail is 20 m (65.62ft) on BBU side and 70 m (229.66 ft) on RRU side.

NOTE

l The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer and must comply withthe ITU-T G.652 standard.

l The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects the single-mode pigtailand trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.

l A multimode fiber optic cable and a single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to a multimode opticalmodule and a single-mode optical module, respectively.

Exterior

Multimode fiber optic cable: The multimode fiber optic cable has a DLC connector at each end,as shown in Figure 7-110.

Figure 7-110 Multimode fiber optic cable

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable (3) Label on the breakout cable



468

NOTE

l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cable on the BBU sideis 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and the breakout cable on the RRU side is 0.03 m (0.098 ft).

l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects two RRUs, the breakout cable on both sides is 0.03 m(0.098 ft).

Figure 7-111 shows the connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and anRRU.

Figure 7-111 Connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

(1) Multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

Single-mode pigtail: The single-mode pigtail has a DLC connector at one end and an FC, LC,or SC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-112.



469

Figure 7-112 Single-mode pigtail

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakoutcable

(3) Label on thebreakout cable

(4) FC connector (5) LC connector (6) SC connector

NOTE

l When a single-mode pigtail connects a BBU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the BBU side andODF side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.

l When a single-mode pigtail connects an RRU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the RRU side andODF side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.

Figure 7-113 shows the connection of the single-mode pigtail.

Figure 7-113 Connection of the single-mode pigtail

(1) Single-mode pigtail between a BBU and an ODF (2) Single-mode pigtail between an RRU and an ODF



470

Selection Principles

The following table describes the principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.

Table 7-85 Principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables

RemoteDistance

Selection Principle Remarks

Less than orequal to 100 m(328.08 ft)

Multimode fiber optic cable Connects the BBU and RRUWhen it connects two RRUs, the distancebetween the two RRUs must be equal to orless than 10 m (32.81 ft).

Greater than100 m (328.08ft) and equal toor less than150 m (492.12ft)

Multimode fiber optic cable Connects the BBU and RRU

Recommended: single-modefiber optic cable (single-modepigtail and trunk single-modefiber optic cable)

The single-mode pigtail at the RRU or BBUside is connected to the trunk single-modefiber optic cable using the ODF.

Greater than150 m (492.12ft)

Single-mode fiber optic cable(single-mode pigtail and trunksingle-mode fiber optic cable)

Pin Assignment

Table 7-86 describes the labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of aCPRI fiber optic cable.

Table 7-86 Labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a CPRI fiberoptic cable

Label Installation Position

Multimode FiberOptic CableBetween a BBUand an RRU

Multimode FiberOptic CableBetween TwoRRUs

Single-Mode Pigtail

1A CPRI RX port on theRRU

CPRI RX port onRRU 1

RX port on the BBU orCPRI RX port on theRRU

1B CPRI TX port on theRRU

CPRI TX port onRRU 1

TX port on the BBU orCPRI TX port on theRRU

2A TX port on the BBU CPRI TX port onRRU 0

ODF



471

Label Installation Position

Multimode FiberOptic CableBetween a BBUand an RRU

Multimode FiberOptic CableBetween TwoRRUs

Single-Mode Pigtail

2B RX port on the BBU CPRI RX port onRRU 0

ODF

7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal CableThe APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable is used to connect the APMI in the APM30 powercabinet and the BBU. The cable transmits environment monitoring signals of the APM30 powercabinet to the BBU.

ExteriorThe APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable has an RJ45 connector at one end and four bare wiresat the other end. Figure 7-114 shows an APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable.

Figure 7-114 APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable

Pin AssignmentTable 7-87 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signalcable.

Table 7-87 Pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable

Pin on theRJ45Connector

Color Pins of X2, X3,X4, and X5

Description CorrespondingPort on theAPMI

X1.1 White X2 Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 Orange X3 TX-

X1.4 Blue X4 Twisted pair RX+

X1.5 White X5 RX-



472

7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal CableThe HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by theHEUB to the BBU.

ExteriorFigure 7-115 shows an HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable.

Figure 7-115 HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Cable DescriptionTable 7-88 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signalcable.

Table 7-88 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable

X1 End X2 End Color Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange


X1.6 X2.6 Green


X1.4 X2.4 Blue


X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal CableThe HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by theHEUA to the BBU.



473

Exterior

Figure 7-116 shows an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable.

Figure 7-116 HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 7-89 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signalcable.

Table 7-89 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Type


X1.2 X2.2 Orange


X1.6 X2.6 Green


X1.4 X2.4 Blue


X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBUThe monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBUand transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.

Exterior

Figure 7-117 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.



474

Figure 7-117 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-90 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe CMUA and the BBU.

Table 7-90 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA andthe BBU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type


X1.2 X2.2 Orange


X1.6 X2.6 Green


X1.4 X2.4 Blue


X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal CableA CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connects the CMUEA and the BBU and transmits themonitoring signals collected by the CMUEA to the BBU.

ExteriorFigure 7-118 shows a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable.



475

Figure 7-118 Exterior of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-91 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signalcable.

Table 7-91 Pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Type


X1.2 X2.2 Orange


X1.6 X2.6 Green


X1.4 X2.4 Blue


X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.2.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUAA monitoring signal cable for the EMUA transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a BBU.This cable is delivered with the EMUA.

ExteriorFigure 7-119 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA.



476

Figure 7-119 Monitoring signal cable for the EMUA

(1) RJ45 connector (2) DB9 male connector

Pin Assignment

Table 7-92 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for theEMUA.

Table 7-92 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA


DB9 maleconnector

Color Description AssociatedPort on theAPMI

X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-

X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-

X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+

7.2.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerstatus of the PSUs and receive related alarms.

Exterior

Figure 7-120 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Figure 7-120 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)



477

Pin AssignmentTable 7-93 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).

Table 7-93 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

X1 End Wire Color Type

X1.2 Blue Twisted pair

X1.1 White

X1.6 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 White

X1.4 Green Twisted pair

X1.5 White

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair

X1.7 White

7.2.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.

ExteriorFigure 7-121 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Figure 7-121 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-94 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).



478

Table 7-94 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type


X1.2 X2.2 Orange


X1.6 X2.6 Green


X1.4 X2.4 Blue


X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.2.20 BBU Alarm CableA BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. Themaximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).

ExteriorThe BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-122. One RJ45connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be addedaccording to the field requirements.

Figure 7-122 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-95 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.



479

Table 7-95 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable

BBUAlarmPort


WireColor

WireType


Description

EXT-ALM1


Twistedpair

X2.1 Boolean input 4+

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 4- (GND)

X1.3 White andgreen

Twistedpair


X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 5- (GND)

X1.5 White andblue

Twistedpair


X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 6- (GND)

X1.7 White andbrown

Twistedpair


X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 7- (GND)

EXT-ALM0


Twistedpair


X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean input 0+(GND)

X1.3 White andgreen

Twistedpair


X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean input 1- (GND)

X1.5 White andblue

Twistedpair


X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean input 2- (GND)

X1.7 White andbrown

Twistedpair


X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean input 3- (GND)

7.2.21 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna systemto the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable isoptional.



480

Exterior

The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type femaleconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-123.

Figure 7-123 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector

7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cableThe BBU interconnection signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward informationbetween the BBUs.

Cable Type

BBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,as listed in Table 7-96.

Table 7-96 Cable type

Cable Function Installation Position

BBU interconnection signalcable

Forwards control andsynchronization informationfrom one BBU to another

Connects the UMPT and theUCIU

Forwards basebandinformation from one BBU toanother

Interconnects two WBBPfboards

Exteriorl The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control and

synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed inthe same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure7-124. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cableis 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-125.



481

Figure 7-124 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)

(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout cable


(1) DLC connector (2) Armoured cable (3) Breakout cable

l The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards baseband

information from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-126. When two BBUs areinstalled in the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. Whentwo BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meterslong.


(1) QSFP connector (2) QSFP connector

7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base StationsWhen a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, thecable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interfaceunit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB)or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

ExteriorThere are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure7-127 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.



482

Figure 7-127 Cable between two combined base stations (1)

(1) MD36 male connector (2) DB15 male connector

Figure 7-128 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.

Figure 7-128 Cable between two combined base stations (2)

(1) DB15 male connector

Pin AssignmentAs shown in Figure 7-127, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 maleconnector at the other end. Table 7-97 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.

Table 7-97 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)


Pin on the MD36Male Connector

Color Wire Type


X1.2 X2.7 Blue


X1.4 X2.12 Orange


X1.10 X2.3 Green


X1.11 X2.16 Brown


X1.15 X2.28 Gray



483


Pin on the MD36Male Connector

Color Wire Type

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -

As shown in Figure 7-128, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-98 liststhe pin assignment for the wires of the cable.

Table 7-98 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)



Color Wire Type


X1.2 X2.2 Blue


X1.4 X2.4 Orange


X1.10 X2.10 Green


X1.11 X2.11 Brown


X1.15 X2.15 Gray

X1.shell X2.shell Shield -

7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local MaintenanceAn adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cableduring local maintenance.

ExteriorThe adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernetconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-129.



484

Figure 7-129 Adapter used for local maintenance

(1) USB connector (2) Ethernet connector

Pin AssignmentTable 7-99 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.

Table 7-99 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance

Pin of the USBConnector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin of the EthernetConnector


X1.8 White X2.2


X1.5 White X2.6

X1.Shell - Shield X2.Shell



485

Documents

DBS3900 Hardware Description 2013